2012 Nissan Titan | Owner's Manual | Nissan USA

®

2012 TITANOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

TIT

AN

A6

0-D

A60-D

Printing : July 2011 (17)

Publication No.: OM1E 0A60U0

Printed in U.S.A.

OM2E 0A60U0Information Provided by:

Information Provided by:

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory installed options, your ve-hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-cessories installed by NISSAN or by yourNISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is importantthat you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,warnings, cautions and instructions concerningproper use of such accessories prior to operatingthe vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSANdealer for details concerning the particular ac-cessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments, assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY



For descriptions specified for four-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the begin-ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate four-wheeldrive models correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure to read“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-ing collision and rollover”, and “Drivingsafety precautions”, in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL



If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-ies, may contain perchlorate material. Thefollowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensedto Visteon.

XM Radio� requiressubscription, soldseparately. Not avail-able in Alaska, Hawaiior Guam. For moreinformation, visitwww.xmradio.com.

© 2011 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005



NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

For U.S. [email protected]

For Canadian [email protected]

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM



Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10Information Provided by:


0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9



1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-15)2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)3. Front seat belts (P. 1-15)4. Front-seat Active Head Restraints5. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-47)6. Seats (P. 1-2)7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P. 1-56)8. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-60)9. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children) (P. 1-28)11. Top tether strap anchor point (P. 1-30)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII2021

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contentsInformation Provided by:


1. Engine hood (P. 3-11)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-27)3. Windshield (P. 8-19)4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)5. Power windows (P. 2-48)6. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-7, 3-2)7. Mirrors (P. 3-17)8. Tire pressure (P. 9-12)9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)10. Tire chains (P. 8-40)11. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30)12. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)13. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-33)14. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-13)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0116

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3Information Provided by:


1. Rear sliding window (if so equipped)(P. 2-51)

2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)3. Tailgate/Truckbox (P. 3-22)4. Trailer hitch/Towing (if so equipped)

(P. 9-24)5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30)6. Bedside storage compartment

(if so equipped) (P. 2-48)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-12, P. 9-3, 9-4)8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-12)9. Child safety rear door lock (Crew Cab

models only) (P. 3-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0027

EXTERIOR REAR



1. DVD entertainment system(if so equipped) (P. 4-56)

2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)3. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)4. Sun visors (P. 3-15)5. HomeLink� (if so equipped) (P. 2-56)6. Glove box (P. 2-42)7. Cup holders (P. 2-45)8. Front seats (P. 1-2)9. Folding rear bench seat (P. 1-13)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0029

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Vents (P. 4-13)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-29)3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped)(P. 4-54, P. 4-71)

4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-32)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-47, P. 2-34)6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-4, 2-13)7. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)8. Shift selector (column) (if so equipped)

(P. 5-16)9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)10. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)11. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)12. Audio system controls (P. 4-30)13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-47)14. Glove box (P. 2-42)15. Climate controls (P. 4-14, P. 4-21,

P. 4-28)WIC1563

INSTRUMENT PANEL



16. Aux jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-52)17. Power outlet (P. 2-38)18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-35)19. Cup holder (P. 2-45)20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-36)21. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38)22. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch(if so equipped) (P.2-36)

23. Shift selector (console)(if so equipped) (P. 5-16)

24. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)25. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-56)26. Power outlet (P. 2-38)27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-27)28. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-27)29. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-14)30. Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34)31. Rear sonar system off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

32. Pedal position adjustment switch(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)

33. Rear power window switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.



1. Battery (P. 8-14)2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)3. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)8. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.


WDI0630

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light

2-14

Automatic transmis-sion check warninglight

2-14

Automatic transmis-sion park warninglight (model)

2-14

or

Brake warning light 2-14

Charge warninglight

2-15

Warninglight

Name Page

Engine oil pressurelow/engine coolanttemperature highwarning light

2-15

4WD warning light( model)

2-16

Low fuel warninglight

2-16

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-16

Master warning light(if so equipped)

2-18

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-18

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-19

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Electronic lockingrear differential (E-Lock) system onindicator light (if soequipped)

2-18

Front passenger airbag status light

2-19

High beam indicatorlight (Blue)

2-19

Malfunction indica-tor light (MIL)

2-19

Security indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-20

Slip indicator light 2-20

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS



Indicatorlight

Name Page

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-20

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) offindicator light

2-20



1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual captain’s chair seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual bench seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Armrests (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head restraints (1st row only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head restraints (2nd row – outboardpositions only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Two-point type seat belt without retractor(center of the front bench seat)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Rear-facing child restraint installation usingLATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Rear-facing child restraint installation usingthe seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Forward-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts — front passenger andrear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts — front bench centerposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Installing top tether strap (Rear bench seat) . . . . . . 1-43Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62



WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN’S CHAIRSEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint systemInformation Provided by:


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)position.

FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

LRS0419 LRS0420 WRS0847

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3Information Provided by:


RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P(Park).

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT(if so equipped)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” for automatic drive po-sitioner operation.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

LRS0427 LRS0633



The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

LRS0634 LRS0635



ARMRESTS (if so equipped)To use the armrests on the captain’s chairs (typeA, if so equipped), pull them down to the restingposition.

To use the center armrest on the bench seat (typeB, if so equipped), pull on the tab in the center ofthe seat and fold it down to the resting position.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (1st row only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

Type A

�A Stowed position

�B Resting position

WRS0368

Type BLRS0425



The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. The first row headrestraints are adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

Components1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

AdjustmentAdjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

LRS2020 LRS0887 WRS0134



To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highestposition.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seatingposition.

LRS0888 LRS0889 LRS0890



Install1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction. The stalk withthe adjustment notches �1 must be installedin the hole with the lock knob �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push thehead restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before anoccupant uses the seating position.

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly asdescribed in this section.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (2nd row –outboard positions only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

LRS0891 SPA1025



The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. The second rowhead restraints are removable but not adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equippedwith a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

Components1. Head restraint

2. Lock knob(s)

3. Stalks

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the headrestraints.

1. Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary.

2. Push and hold the lock knob(s).

3. Pull the head restraint up until it is removedfrom the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad-just the seat or seatback before an occupantuses the seating position.

LRS2020 LRS2073 LRS2074



Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holesin the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction.

2. Push the head restraint down until it locks inplace.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seats when they arein the fold-down position. In a collision,people riding in these areas withoutproper restraints are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

● Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.

● Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Always replace and adjust them prop-erly if they have been removed for anyreason.

● If the head restraints are removed forany reason, they should be securelystored to prevent them from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

LRS2075



Folding the front passenger’s seatbackflat (if so equipped)To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forextra storage length when transporting longitems:

�1 Slide the seat to the rear most position. Thenlift up on the recline lever, located on theoutside of the seat, and fold the seatbackforward as far as it will go.

�2 Lift up on the latch located on the uppercorner of the seatback to release the back ofthe seat. This will enable you to fold the frontpassenger seatback flat over the seat cush-ion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to aseating position, lift up on the seatback andpush it up to an upright position. Then pull upon the recline lever and lean the seatback toa proper seating position. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

WARNING

● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-back flat forward to carry longer ob-jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-cured and not near an air bag. In acrash, an inflating air bag might forcethat object toward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death. Se-cure objects away from the area inwhich an air bag would inflate. See“Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem” later in this section.


LRS0341 LRS0342



Folding the rear bench seatTo fold the rear bench seat up for storage capac-ity behind the front seats or to remove the jackingtools from the storage area:

�1 Lift up on the lever, located on the side of theseat, while lifting the front of the seat cushionup.

�2 Fold the bottom of the seat cushion towardthe back of the vehicle until it locks in place.

�3 Repeat this process to raise and secure theseat cushion on the other side of the vehiclefor maximum storage capacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seating posi-tion, reverse the process. Make sure to prop-erly push the seat cushion down into place.

LRS0398 LRS0399 LRS0400



WARNING

● When the vehicle is being used to carrycargo, properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly. Never ride in the rearseat unless the seat bottom cushionsare in place and latched.


Folding the rear bench seatback down

The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward toaccess the child restraint anchor point locations.

To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up �1and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchorpoints �2 can be accessed behind the rearbench seatback.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areas bypassengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

WRS0920



PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014



PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual front seat shownLRS0419



�2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock dur-ing a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits the seatbelt to move, and allows you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Thensmoothly pull the belt out of the re-tractor.

�3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

�4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by a passenger, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion. It can also change the operation ofthe front passenger air bag. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

WRS0137 WRS0138



WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

�1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139



Shoulder belt height adjustment (frontoutboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out �1 the adjustment button andmove the shoulder belt anchor �2 to the desiredposition, so the belt passes over the center of theshoulder. The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulderbelt anchor into position.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITHOUT RETRACTOR (center ofthe front bench seat) (if so equipped)

Front seatsLRS0242 LRS0642



Fastening the seat belts

�1 Insert the tongue into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage.

�2 Tighten the belt by pulling the free end of thebelt away from the tongue.

�3 Position the lap belt low and snug on thehips as illustrated.

LRS0643 LRS0644 LRS0645



�4 Loosen the belt by holding the tongue at aright angle to the belt, then pull on the belt.

Unfastening the seat belts

�1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender that is compatible withthe installed seat belts is available that can bepurchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in(200 mm) of length and may be used for eitherthe driver or front passenger seating position.See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-chasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

LRS0646 LRS0647



● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Forward-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Forward-facing child restraintsare available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child re-straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle byusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seatbelt. See the “Child restraints” section for moreinformation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.Studies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

CHILD SAFETY



This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facingchild restraint as long as possible up to the heightor weight limit of the child restraint. Forward-facing child restraints are available for childrenwho outgrow rear-facing child restraints and areat least 1 year old. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a child

restraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lapportion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-men. The booster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the top, middle portion of the shoulderand the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seatcan only be used in seating positions that have athree-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-fying that it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Once the child has grown sothe shoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoarea. The child could be seriously injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collision.



PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– The child restraint must be used andinstalled properly. Always follow allof the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never beheld on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-gest adult cannot resist the forces ofa collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both achild and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a forward-facing childrestraint in the front seat, see“Forward-facing child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” laterin this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. An inflating air bag could seri-ously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only beused in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraintthat will fit the child and vehicle.Some child restraints may not fitproperly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



– Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand loads from childrestraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adultseat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, loose objects can injure occu-pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seating sur-face and buckles before placing a child inthe child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem. Some child restraints include rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes. When se-lecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated. Canadian law requires thetop tether strap on forward-facing childrestraints be secured to the designated an-chor point on the vehicle.



LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints. This system may also be referredto as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-tions for proper use and installation ofchild restraints could result in serious in-jury or death of a child or other passen-gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH lower anchors. The childrestraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower anchorarea. Feel to make sure there are noobstructions over the anchors suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the lower an-chors are obstructed.

LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label isattached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

LATCH system lower anchor locationsLRS0429

LATCH lower anchor locationLRS0748



Installing child restraint LATCH loweranchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor point locationsLRS0395

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662



Top tether anchor point locationsAnchor points are located under the rear windowbehind the rear bench seat.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraints” sections beforeinstalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCHsystem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

LRS0393Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2

WRS0801



3. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint or try installing byusing the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3LRS0673




5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

WRS0256



Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256





4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.






7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraints” sections beforeinstalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint in the 2nd row seats using theLATCH system:


2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Installing top tether strap” in thissection. Do not install child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap in seat-ing positions that do not have a top tetheranchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the child restraintis removed. See “Head restraints” in thissection for head restraint adjustment infor-mation.

Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0800



If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 4LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6WRS0697



7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — FRONTPASSENGER AND REAR BENCHSEAT

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraints” sections beforeinstalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belt in therear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the child restraintis removed. See “Head restraints” in thissection for head restraint adjustment, re-moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699



3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section. Donot install child restraints that require the useof a top tether strap in seating positions thatdo not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts toEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.






6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the seat belt holds the restraint inplace. If the restraint is not secure, tightenthe seat belt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again. Youmay need to try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.





10. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated see �Front passengerair bag and status light� in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — FRONT BENCHCENTER POSITION

WARNING

● Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front passenger seat.Front air bags inflate with great force. Arear-facing child restraint could bestruck by the front air bag in a crash andcould seriously injure or kill your child.

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front centerbench seat, follow these instructionscarefully.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

Forward-facing – step 10LRS0865 WRS0256



Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraints” sections beforeinstalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a child restraint in thefront center bench seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seat back. Ifnecessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.See “Head restraints” earlier in this section.If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to install the headrestraint when the child restraint is removed.If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for seat belt routing.

Foward-Facing — step 1WRS0914

Forward-Facing — step 3WRS0915



4. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt. Press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the seat belt holds the restraint inplace. If the restraint is not secure, tightenthe seat belt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again. Youmay need to try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 5.





INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP(Rear bench seat)To access the anchor points �2 behind the rearbench seat, tilt the rear seatback forward bylifting up on the pull strap �1 behind the seat-back.

Before securing the child restraint with theLATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seating po-sitions only) or the seat belt, as applicable, followthese steps.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-straint to position the top tether strap �1over the top of the seatback. If the headrestraint is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the head restraintwhen the child restraint is removed. See“Head restraints” in this section forhead restraint adjustment, removaland installation information.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe seatback and under the head restraint.

3. Secure the tether strap �2 to the tetheranchor point �3 on the seat directly behindthe child restraint.

4. Return the seatback to the locked position.

5. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-stallation procedure steps in this sectionbefore tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not usedproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a sudden stop or collision greatlyincreases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’s faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

Anchor point accessLRS0392

Rear bench seatWRS0423



– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child’sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has alap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455 LRS0453



Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat �1 is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat �2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place the child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with thechild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

Booster seat installation on frontpassenger seat and rear seat

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety”, “Child Restraints” and “Booster Seats”sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0464



1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the booster seat isremoved. See “Head restraints” in this sec-tion for head restraint adjustment, removaland installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point type seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454



7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMThis Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and right front passenger in certainfrontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the chest area of thedriver and right front passenger in certain sideimpact collisions. The side air bag is designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force to thehead of occupants in front and rear outboardseating positions in certain side impact or rollovercollisions. In a side impact, the curtain and roll-over air bags are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, bothcurtain and rollover air bags are designed toinflate and remain inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlierin this section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

LRS0865

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags asneeded. Failure to properly wear seatbelts can increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

WRS0031



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain and rollover air bagsinflate if they are not properly re-strained. Pre-teens and children shouldbe properly restrained in the rear seat, ifpossible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact and rollover supplemental airbags:

● The side air bags and curtain and roll-over air bags ordinarily will not inflate inthe event of a frontal impact, rear im-pact, or lower severity side collision.Always wear your seat belts to helpreduce the risk or severity of injury invarious kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431



WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain and rollover air bags are mosteffective when you are sitting well backand upright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.SSS0162



WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159



1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bags inflators

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)4. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules5. Crash zone sensor6. Occupant classification system control

unit7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor)8. Seat belt buckle switches9. Seat belt with pretensioner10. Satellite sensors11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and rightfront passenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.LRS2093



The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The supplemental front air bags are designed toinflate in higher severity frontal collisions, al-though they may inflate if the forces in anothertype of collision are similar to those of a higherseverity frontal impact. They may not inflate incertain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lackof it) is not always an indication of proper front airbag system operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the Air Bag Control Unit(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-sification sensor (pressure sensor) and right frontpassenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator op-eration is based on the severity of a collision andseat belt usage for the driver. For the right frontpassenger, it additionally monitors the weight ofan occupant or object on the seat and seat belttension. Based on information from the sensors,only one front air bag may inflate in a crash,depending on the crash severity and whether thefront occupants are belted or unbelted. Addition-ally, the right front passenger air bag may beautomatically turned OFF under some conditions,depending on the weight detected on the pas-senger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger airbag status light will be illuminated (if the seat isunoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, butthe air bag will be off). See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this section forfurther details. One front air bag inflating does notindicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thebeginning of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the driver and right front passenger. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thefront air bags inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tion.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.



Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The right front passenger air bag statuslight is located under the climate controls.After the ignition switch is placed in the �ON�position, the front passenger air bag status lighton the instrument panel illuminates for about 7seconds and then turns off or operates depend-ing on the front passenger seat occupied status.The light operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light is OFF to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is opera-tional.

Front passenger air bag

The right front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF when the vehicle is oper-ated under some conditions as described belowin accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of theright front passenger seat cushion and is de-signed to detect an occupant and objects on theright front seat by weight. It works together withseat belt sensors described later. For example, ifa child is in the right front passenger seat, theAdvanced Air Bag System is designed to turn thepassenger air bag OFF in accordance with theregulations. Also, if a child restraint of the typespecified in the regulations is on the seat, itsweight and the child’s weight can be detectedand cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupantclassification sensor operation can vary depend-ing on the right front passenger seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). Based on the

LRS0865



weight on the seat detected by the occupantclassification sensor and the belt tension de-tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air BagSystem determines whether the front passengerair bag should be automatically turned OFF, asrequired by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF; however, if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode(child restraint mode), this could cause the airbag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to beseated and wearing the seat belt properly for themost effective protection by the seat belt andsupplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specified

child restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the ALR mode (child restraint mode) mayallow the restraint to tip or move in an accident orsudden stop. This can also result in the passen-ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of beingOFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor proper use and installation.

If the right front passenger seat is not occupiedthe passenger air bag is designed not to inflate ina crash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the right frontpassenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.



If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areaon the driver’s side of the instrument panel, willblink. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthor-ized electrical test equipment and prob-ing devices should not be used on theair bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.



Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-over air bags are located in the side roof rails.These systems are designed to meet voluntaryguidelines to help reduce the risk of injury toout-of-position occupants. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bagsare designed to inflate in higher severity side

collisions, although they may inflate if the forcesin another type of collision are similar to those ofa higher severity side impact. They are designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted. They may not inflate in certain side colli-sions.

Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed toinflate in certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements(for example, during severe off roading) maycause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain androllover air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain and rolloverair bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke is notharmful and does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritationand choking. Those with a history of a breathingcondition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest ofthe front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bagshelp to cushion the impact force to the head ofoccupants in the front and rear outboard seatingpositions. They can help save lives and reduceserious injuries. However, an inflating side air bagor curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra-

sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtainand rollover air bags do not provide restraint tothe lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away aspractical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover airbags inflate quickly in order to help protect theoccupants. Because of this, the force of the sideair bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflatingcan increase the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in-flated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain and rolloverair bags operate only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

LRS2094



WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain and rolloverair bag systems. This is to prevent dam-age to or accidental inflation of the sideair bag and curtain and rollover air bagsystems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thecurtain and rollover air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain and rollover air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors areyellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain and rollover air bag systems and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but a pretensioner is not acti-vated, be sure to have the pretensionersystem checked and, if necessary, re-placed by your NISSAN dealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.



● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

Working with the seat belt retractor, the preten-sioner helps tighten the seat belt when the ve-hicle becomes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light isused to indicate malfunctions in the pretensionersystem. (See �SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT� in this section for more de-tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bagwarning light indicates there is a malfunction,have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

WRS0885



SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-sioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand pretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag and curtain and rollover air bag or preten-sioner systems may not operate properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. Take your vehicleto the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover supplemental air bags and pretensionersare designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis.As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supple-mental air bag warning light remains illuminated

after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-ment of these supplemental air bag systemsshould be done only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover air bags, pretensioners and related partsshould be pointed out to the person performingthe maintenance. The ignition key should alwaysbe in the LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag orcurtain and rollover air bag has inflated,the air bag module will not functionagain and must be replaced. Addition-ally, the activated pretensioners mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pretensioners should be replacedby a NISSAN dealer. The air bag moduleand pretensioner cannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainand rollover air bag systems and thepretensioner system should be in-spected by a NISSAN dealer if there isany damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle.

LRS0100



● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Cor-rect supplemental air bag and preten-sioner system disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriate NISSANService Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-cedures could cause personal injury.



2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-7Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-13Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Vehicle Information Display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-21How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-21

Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-25NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-32Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) systemswitch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-37Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Information Provided by:


Center armrest storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Overhead console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Lockable bedside storage compartment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Manual windows (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Rear power window switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-51

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55HomeLink� universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-56

Programming HomeLink�. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56Programming HomeLink� for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57Operating the HomeLink� universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Reprogramming a single HomeLink� button . . . . . . 2-58If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58



1. Vents (P. 4-13)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-29)3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-54,P. 4-71)

4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-32)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-47, P. 2-34)6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-4, 2-13)7. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)8. Shift selector (column) (if so equipped)

(P. 5-16)9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)10. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)11. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)12. Audio system controls (P. 4-30)13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-47)14. Glove box (P. 2-42)15. Climate controls (P. 4-14, P. 4-21,

P. 4-28)WIC1563

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controlsInformation Provided by:


16. Aux jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-52)17. Power outlet (P. 2-38)18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-35)19. Cup holder (P. 2-45)20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-36)21. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38)22. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch(if so equipped) (P.2-36)

23. Shift selector (console)(if so equipped) (P. 5-16)

24. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)25. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-56)26. Power outlet (P. 2-38)27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-27)28. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-27)29. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-14)30. Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34)31. Rear sonar system off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

32. Pedal position adjustment switch(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)

33. Rear power window switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).


Instruments and controls 2-3Information Provided by:


1. Warning/indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Engine coolant temperature gauge4. Voltmeter (if so equipped)5. Fuel gauge6. Speedometer

7. Automatic transmission fluid tempera-ture gauge (if so equipped)

8. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/VehicleInformation Display

9. Engine oil pressure gauge(if so equipped)

WIC1243

METERS AND GAUGES



1. Speedometer2. Odometer/twin trip display3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Odometer only

Elapsed time , driving distance and averagespeed information is also available for vehicleswith a navigation system. Refer to “Control panelbuttons” in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-tioner, audio and phone systems”.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the currently displayed trip odometerto zero.

WIC1244 WIC1245



TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone �1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range �1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

WIC1246 LIC1135



FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible.After a few driving trips. the lightshould turn off. If the light remains onafter a few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (ifso equipped)The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running. Theneedle should be in the middle of the gauge whenthe engine is running.

LIC1199 LIC1198



CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

VOLTMETER (if so equipped)When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt-age. When the engine is running, it indicates thegenerator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop belowthe normal range. If the needle is not in the normalrange (11 - 15 volts) �1 while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging systemis not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGE (if soequipped)

This gauge indicates the temperature of the au-tomatic transmission fluid. The automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is in the normal range�1 when the gauge needle points within the zoneshown in the illustration.

LIC1136 WIC1247



CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow automatic transmission fluid level.Use the dipstick to check the fluid level.(See “5-speed automatic transmissionfluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

● If the gauge indicates automatic trans-mission fluid temperature over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. Have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-ued operation of the vehicle may seri-ously damage the transmission.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the or button as described in thecharts below to activate various features of theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror.Type A

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 secondsAutomatic anti-glare/indicator lighttoggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

Type B

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glarefeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)



COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the or button for about 1 sec-ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition to toggle the compass direction display�1 on or off. The display will indicate the directionthat the vehicle is heading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass bydriving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

Type AWIC0904

Type BLIC0583



Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about11 seconds or the button for about 8seconds. The current zone number will ap-pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button repeat-edly to toggle through the zone numbersuntil the desired number appears in the dis-play. Once you have selected a zone num-ber, the display will show a compass direc-tion within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.WIC0355



1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe button for about 13 seconds orthe for about 10 seconds. The “C” or“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-minate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehiclein three complete circles at a maximumspeed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.



or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

Low fuel warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission check warning light Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning light( model)

Master warning light (if so equipped) Security indicator light (if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system on indicator light (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicatorlight

4WD warning light ( model) Front passenger air bag status light

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information on warnings and indi-cators, see “Vehicle information display” later inthis section.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Automatic Transmission checkwarning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.If the light comes on at any other time, it mayindicate the automatic transmission system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

Automatic transmission parkwarning light ( model)

WARNING

● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) po-sition will not function and the transfercase is in neutral.

● When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illuminatesand the parking brake is set. Failure toengage the transfer position in 2WD, 4Hor 4LO could result in the vehicle mov-ing unexpectedly, resulting in seriouspersonal injury or property damage.

● Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4Hor 4LO position again to turn off the ATPwarning light when the shift selector tothe P position and the ATP warning lightis ON. (Before shifting the 4WD switchinto the 4LO position, move the shiftselector to the N position once, shift theshift selector into P again and makesure the ATP warning light is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control is not secured in any drive position

while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,the transmission will disengage and the drivewheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.



WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator

When the parking brake is released and thebrake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brakewarning light and the Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate theABS is not functioning properly. Have the brakesystem checked, and if necessary, repaired by aNISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-

ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warning light” in this section.)

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely. Refer to “Variablevoltage control system” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section laterin this manual.

● Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Engine oil pressure low/Engine coolant temperaturehigh warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure or highengine coolant temperature.

If the light flickers or comes on during normaldriving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop theengine and allow it to cool. If the light remains onafter checking the oil and coolant, stop the en-gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer orother authorized repair shop.

This light is not designed to indicate a lowoil or low coolant level. Check the oil levelwith the dipstick and check the coolant level onthe reservoir. See “Engine oil” and “Checkingengine coolant level” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual. Also see “Ifyour vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

● Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.



● If the gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature over the normal range,stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos-sible. If the engine is overheated, con-tinued operation of the vehicle may se-riously damage the engine. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section for immediate ac-tion required.

4WD warning light (model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the keyswitch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after theengine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,the warning light will either remain illuminated orblink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksduring operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WDwarning light turns on when you aredriving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the shift selector to the N posi-tion with the brake pedal depressed,and shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.

● If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning alsoappears in the vehicle information display.If you select the tire pressure informationin the display (if so equipped), the LOWPRESSURE warning message will be dis-played. The tire pressure for each tire willalso be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low



tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is activeas long as the low tire pressure warning lightremains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Vehicle informa-tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section andin the “In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSUREwarning does not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-function.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section in thismanual.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch in the ON position, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealeras soon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifthe light still comes on while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.



Master warning light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when various vehicle infor-mation display warnings appear.

● No key warning

● Low fuel warning

● Low windshield-washer fluid warning

● Parking brake release warning

● Door open warning

● Loose fuel cap warning

● Check tire pressure warning

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag,and pretensioner systems need servicing andyour vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the seatbelts with pretensioner system may not functionproperly. For additional details see “Supplemen-tal restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionof this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

INDICATOR LIGHTSFor additional information on warnings and indi-cators, see “Vehicle information display” later inthis section.

Electronic locking reardifferential (E-Lock) system onindicator light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the electronic lockingrear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fullyengaged.



The indicator light flashes when the system is firstturned on. When the system fully engages, thelight remains on. If the switch is on and theindicator light continues to flash, the system isnot engaged.

For additional information, see “Electronic lock-ing rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” laterin this section and “Electronic locking rear differ-ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

Front passenger air bag statuslight

The front passenger air bag status light will be litand the passenger front air bag will be OFFdepending on how the front passenger seat isbeing used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap ifthe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears inthe vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or installthe cap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does not turnoff after a few driving trips, have the vehicleinspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed to thedealer.

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.



The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Security indicator light (if soequipped)

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This functionindicates the security system equipped on thevehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system orthe traction control system is operating, thusalerting that the vehicle is nearing its tractionlimits. The road surface may be slippery.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) off indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, thetransfer case is in the 4LO position (model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem is not functioning properly. This indicatesthe Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper-ating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switchagain or restart the engine and the system willoperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in the ONposition. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-onds if the system is operational. If the light stayson or comes on along with the indicator

light while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system checked by a NISSANdealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hearthe system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

The VDC system will be disabled and the VDClight will illuminate when the electronic lockingrear differential (E-lock) system switch (if soequipped) is turned on and the E-lock system isengaged. If the E-lock system disengages or theswitch is turned off, the VDC system will beenabled and the VDC light will turn off.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.



Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

The vehicle information display �1 is located tothe left of the speedometer. It displays such itemsas:

● automatic transmission position indicator

● cruise control system information (if soequipped)

● some indicators and warnings

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLEINFORMATION DISPLAYPress the vehicle information display INFO but-ton �1 located on the instrument panel to togglethrough the following modes.

MPG → Range → Warning

Rotate the INFO button �2 to highlight the de-sired menu option within the selected mode.Press the INFO button �1 to enter the high-lighted menu.

WIC1248 WIC1249

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (ifso equipped)



The icons at the bottom of the display screenshow the options available:

ENTER — Press the INFO button to selecta highlighted option.

NEXT — Rotate the INFO button to high-light an option.

Warning mode (if so equipped)

The warning mode can be selected to view anywarnings that may be present. Once the screen isselected you have the option of skipping thewarning or viewing it in detail.

Warnings can be present for issues such as anopen door or low fuel. For more information aboutpotential warnings, see “Vehicle information dis-play warnings and indicators” later in this section.

WIC1166



Vehicle information display warningsand indicators

1. Door open warning

2. Low fuel warning

3. Low windshield-washer fluid warning

4. Parking brake warning

5. Cruise main switch indicator (if so equipped)

6. Cruise set switch indicator (if so equipped)

7. Transfer 4LO position indicator (model)

8. 4WD shift indicator ( model)

9. Automatic transmission position indicator

10. Loose fuel cap warning

11. Check tire pressure warning

LIC2006



Door open warning

This warning illuminates when a door has beenopened and the engine is running.

Low fuel warning

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in thefuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuel gaugereaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-serve of fuel in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

This warning illuminates when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Parking brake warning

This warning illuminates when the parking brakeis set and the vehicle is driven.

Cruise main switch indicator (if soequipped)

This indicator illuminates when the cruise controlmain switch is pushed. The indicator turns offwhen the main switch is pushed again. When thecruise main switch indicator illuminates, thecruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator (if soequipped)

This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speedis controlled by the cruise control system. If theindicator blinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate the cruise control system is not function-ing properly. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

Transfer 4LO position indicator (model)

This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shiftswitch is set in the 4LO position with the ignitionswitch placed in the ON position.

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO positionand the indicator blinks, stop the vehicle, driveslowly forward and the indicator will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle, move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position, then depress and turn the 4WD shiftswitch to 4LO or 4H.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift theswitch while driving.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you have firststopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector

to N (Neutral). Make sure the transfer 4LO posi-tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WDshift switch to 4LO.

The indicator may blink while shifting fromone drive mode to the other.

4WD shift indicator ( model)

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator will illuminate the position selected by the4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator may blink whileshifting from one drive mode to the other.

Automatic transmission position indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this indicator shows the shift selectorposition. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap isnot tightened correctly after the vehicle has beenrefueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire pressurewarning light in the meter illuminates and low tirepressure is detected. If this warning appears,stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to



the recommended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label. See “Lowtire pressure warning light” earlier in this sectionand “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section.

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system (if so equipped)

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if soequipped)

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if soequipped)

The vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the key, power door lockswitch (if the door is opened, locked andthen closed), or with the keyfob.

LIC0644

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)



Keyfob operation:

● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicleswithout navigation system) in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section or“Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles withnavigation system) in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner, audio and phone sys-tems” section.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the door isunlocked by the key or the keyfob, or theignition switch is placed to ACC or ON, thesystem will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe door, the system may not arm. Fur-thermore, if the key is turned beyondthe vertical position toward the unlockposition to remove the key, the systemmay be disarmed when the key is re-moved. If the indicator light fails toglow for a period of time, unlock thedoor once and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system will armwith all doors closed and locked with theignition switch in the OFF position.

● The lockable bedside storage com-partment (if so equipped) is not pro-tected by the vehicle security system.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates ifthe vehicle is tampered with again. The alarmcan be shut off by unlocking the driver’s doorwith the key or by pressing the buttonon the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by usingthe inside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor with the key or by pressing the buttonon the keyfob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.



3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob toward�A (Slower) or �B (Faster). Also, the inter-mittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

LIC0474 LIC0965

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion for vehicles with navigation system.Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-dio and phone systems”section later in thismanual.

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up �4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you �5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer reservoir is empty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer reser-voir with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. So methyl alcohol basedwindshield-washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled with filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-centrates with water to the manufactur-er’s recommended levels before pour-ing the fluid into the windshield-washerreservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

Type ALIC0488

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH



NOTE:

If the rear power window (if so equipped) islowered while the defroster switch is on,the rear window defroster will automati-cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors (ifso equipped) will remain on. The rear win-dow defroster will automatically turn onwhen the rear power window is fully closedif the switch is on.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

�1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

�2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Type BLIC1173

Type CLIC1158

Type ASIC2745

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for a period of time afteryou place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and all doors are closed.

Type BWIC1250

Type CSIC3019 WIC1251



To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion �1 .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition and a door is opened and left open, theheadlights remain ON for a period of time. Ifanother door is opened while the headlights areon, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, , or position.Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor �1 located on the topside of the instrument panel. The autolightsensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it isdark out and the headlights will illuminate.If this occurs while parked with the engineoff and the ignition switch placed in the ONposition, your vehicle’s battery could be-come discharged.

Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionwhile the headlight switch is in theor position, the headlights will turn off aftera period of time.

LIC0836 WIC1252



After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again if the headlightswitch is moved to the OFF position and then

turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in

the , or AUTO position (with auto-lights activated).

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night.

WIC1506



TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

WIC1253 WIC1254 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH



The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch downto the ON position. The tailgate lights (if soequipped) will also illuminate when the cargolamp switch is in the ON position.

CAUTION

Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFFposition when you leave the vehicle forextended periods of time, otherwise thebattery will go dead.

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of thesteering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

LIC0616 LIC0604

CARGO LAMP SWITCH (if soequipped)

HORN



1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, asdesired, depending on the temperature. Theindicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use theseat heater if you or the occupants cannotmonitor elevated seat temperatures orhave an inability to feel pain in body partsthat contact the seat. Use of the seatheater by such people could result in se-rious injury.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

WIC1441

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)



The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock)system can help provide added traction if thevehicle is stuck or becoming stuck.

To activate the E-Lock system:

● the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position(4-wheel drive vehicles),

● the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4MPH (7 km/h) or less, and

● the E-Lock system switch must be turnedON.

When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indi-cator light will flash until the system engages.However, if all operation conditions listed aboveare not met or the system becomes disengaged,the indicator light will continue to flash.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabledand the ABS light illuminates when the E-Locksystem is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC lightilluminates when the E-Lock system is ON.

See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system” in the “Starting and Driving” section forfurther explanation and system limitations.

WARNING

● Never leave the E-Lock system ONwhen driving on paved or hard-surfacedroads. Turning the vehicle may result inthe rear wheels slipping and result in anaccident and personal injury. After us-ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-hicle, turn the system OFF.

LIC1548 LIC0729

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEMSWITCH (if so equipped)



● Use the E-Lock system only when free-ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO positionbefore using the E-Lock system. Neveruse the E-Lock system on a slipperyroad surface such as snow or ice sur-face. Using the E-Lock system whendriving in these road conditions maycause unexpected movement of the ve-hicle during engine braking, accelerat-ing or turning, which may result in anaccident and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

● After using the E-Lock system, turn theswitch OFF to prevent possible damageto driveline components from extendeduse.

● Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h)when the system is engaged. Doing socould result in possible damage to thedriveline.

● Do not turn on the E-lock system whilethe tires are spinning. Doing so coulddamage drivetrain components.

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safe todo so before backing up. Always back upslowly.

The rear sonar system is active when the ignitionswitch is placed to the ON position and the shiftselector is in R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.Push the switch again to enable the system. Theindicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next timethe ignition switch is turned on.

See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

LIC0471

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(if so equipped)



Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavytrailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehiclein the tow mode with no trailer/load or lighttrailer/light load will not cause any damage. How-ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and thetransmission/engine driving characteristics mayfeel unusual.

Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi-nates when tow mode is selected. Press the towmode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion later in this manual.

LIC0594Front row

WIC1404

TOW MODE SWITCH POWER OUTLET



The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The power outlets located on the driver’s side ofthe instrument panel and in the truck box arepowered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The power outlets located on the passenger’sside of the instrument panel, inside the centerarmrest, and in the 2nd row are powered onlywhen the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine runningto avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

2nd row (if so equipped)WIC0643

Inside center armrest (if so equipped)LIC0618



Do not use the outlet located in the truck box withaccessories that exceed 12 volt, 120W (15A)power draw . Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

CAUTION

For the power outlet located in the bed ofthe truck, do not use with accessories thatexceed a 12 volt, 120W (15A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or more thanone electrical accessory.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGETRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

The rubber mats can be removed for cleaning.

In truck box (if so equipped)LIC0617

Side trayLIC0565

Center tray (if so equipped)LIC0566

STORAGE



CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)

Console box storage trays

Console box storagePull up on the lever �1 to open the console box lid�2 .

Console box lockUse the master key to lock �1 or unlock �2 theconsole box.

LIC1369 LIC1370 LIC1371



CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if soequipped)To access the center armrest storage area, lowerthe center armrest and lift the lid.

GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove boxlock (if so equipped). The valet key cannot beused.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

LIC0621 LIC0578



SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if soequipped)To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

● Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

MAP POCKETSLIC0567 LIC0589



SEATBACK POCKET (if so equipped)The seatback pocket is located on the back of thedriver’s seat. The pocket can be used to storemaps.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (if soequipped)

Storage bins

WARNING

Keep storage bins closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

Push the button to open a storage bin.

Push the lid up to close.

LIC0575Small bin (if so equipped)

LIC0568

Medium bin (if so equipped)LIC0569



CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder sothat the cup is held securely.

Front — Type ALIC1372

Front — Type BLIC0620

Adjustable (if so equipped)LIC1373



To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of frontconsole), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.

Armrest (if so equipped)LIC0622

2nd row (rear of front console)(if so equipped)

LIC0554

2nd row bench (if so equipped)LIC0556



CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)The grocery hooks allow for standard size plasticgrocery bags to hang side by side.

To access the grocery hooks, fold up the rearbench seat. See “Folding the rear bench seat” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section earlier in this manual.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 18lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

Bottle holder — Type ALIC0558

Bottle holder — Type BLIC0624 LIC0626



LOCKABLE BEDSIDE STORAGECOMPARTMENT (if so equipped)

To access the bedside storage compartment,hold the key hole cover open and insert themaster key. Turn the key clockwise to unlock thelid.

The tray inside the bedside storage compartmentis adjustable.

The bedside storage compartment will automati-cally lock when the lid is closed. You do not needto use the key.

CAUTION

● Do not store a total load of more than 22lbs (10 kg) inside the storagecompartment.

● Do not use the storage compartment orstorage compartment lid as a step. Do-ing so may damage them.

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for aperiod of time after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of time, thepower to the windows is canceled.

LIC0625

WINDOWS



1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side automatic switch4. Right rear passenger window switch5. Left rear passenger window switch6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch andhold it up. To stop the opening or closing functionat any time, simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down �1 .To close the window, pull the switch up �2 .

WIC0845 LIC0580



Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down �1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. To stop thewindow, press the switch down while the windowis closing.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,or jump started, the power window auto-reversefunction may not operate properly. If this occurs,please contact the dealer to re-initialize thepower window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

LIC0581 LIC0410



MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)The side windows can be opened or closed byturning the hand crank on each door.

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if soequipped)Squeeze the handles of the lever �1 , then slidethe window open �2 .

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH(if so equipped)

To open the rear power window, push in and holdthe switch.

To close the rear power window, pull out and holdthe switch.

To stop the opening or closing function at anytime, simply release the switch.

WIC0263 LIC0627 LIC1553



NOTE:

If the rear power window (if so equipped) islowered while the defroster switch is on,the rear window defroster will automati-cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors (ifso equipped) will remain on. The rear win-dow defroster will automatically turn onwhen the rear power window is fully closedif the switch is on.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. The auto-matic moonroof is operational for a period of time,even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orOFF position. If the driver’s door or the frontpassenger’s door is opened during this period oftime, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroofTo fully open the moonroof, push the switch to-ward the open position �3 .

To fully close the moonroof, push the switchtoward the close position �4 .

To open or close the moonroof part way, push theswitch in any direction �5 while the moonroof issliding open or closed to stop it in the desiredposition.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to-ward the up position �1 .

To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switchtoward the down position �2 .

Restarting the moonroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable afterthe battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected. Use the following reset procedure toreturn moonroof operation to normal.

1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tiltingswitch repeatedly toward the down position�2 to fully close the lid.

2. Push and hold the tilting switch for morethan 2 seconds toward the down position�2 to reestablish the lid’s home position.

The moonroof should now operate normally.

WIC0812

MOONROOF (if so equipped)



Auto-reverse function (when closing ortilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-matic operation when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position or for a period of timeafter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroofwill immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the moonroof will fully closegradually. Make sure nothing is caught in themoonroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair themoonroof.



The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after a period of timeunless the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

When the switch is in the DOOR or normaloperation position �2 , the interior lights, puddlelights (if so equipped) and cargo light will stay onfor a period of time when:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a keyor the power door lock switch while all doorsare closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is activatedwhen:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position �3 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition. The puddle lights (if so equipped) andcargo light come on when any front or rear pas-senger door is opened.

The lights will turn off automatically after a periodof time while doors are open to prevent the bat-tery from becoming discharged.

NOTE:

The footwell and door step lights (if soequipped) illuminate when the driver andpassenger doors are open regardless ofthe interior light switch position. Theselights will turn off automatically after aperiod of time while doors are open toprevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Type ALIC0585

Type BLIC0630

INTERIOR LIGHT



CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)The console light �1 will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjustedwith the illumination brightness control.

The personal lights on the overhead console canbe swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on the light,press the button. Press the button again to turnoff the light.

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

LIC0587 LIC0623 LIC0586

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped) MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)



The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLink� will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLink� Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink� Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information, refer to “Program-ming HomeLink�” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLink�Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK�

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLink� buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light �1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface.

WIC0986

HOMELINK� UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)



3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLink� button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLink� flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLink� button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink� blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLink� has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLink� to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener’s program but-

ton, quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLink� button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLink� button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink� button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLink� buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLink� buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLink� buttons, refer tothe HomeLink� web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK� FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLink�, continue to press and hold theHomeLink� button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLink�”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

WIC0987



NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK�UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLink� Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver button. The amber indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLink� does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLink� surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLink� andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLink� is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINK� BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink� Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink� but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLink� surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLink� indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLink� buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLink�buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLink�. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.



FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.



MEMO



3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with power door lock switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Wide Open doors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Automatic door locks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Child safety rear door lock(Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27



1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip (if so equipped) and chromeNISSAN brand symbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip(if so equipped)

3. Key number plate4. Transponder chip (if so equipped)A key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the console boxlock, the bedside storage compartment lock, orthe glove box lock (if so equipped).

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to

your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustmentsInformation Provided by:


When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors can not be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

Manual (if so equipped)To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of thevehicle �1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear�2 .

Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front �1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear �2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral �3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors �4 .

Driver’s sideWPD0311 LPD0240

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3Information Provided by:


Opening and closing windowsThe driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position �1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position �2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position �1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position �2 .

Inside lockLPD0241 WPD0381



Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition switch and anydoor open, all doors will lock and then unlockautomatically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

WIDE OPEN DOORS (if so equipped)

CAUTION

Do not open the Wide Open door to thefull open position while the fuel-filler dooris open; only open it as far as the firstdetent. Opening the door to the full openposition may damage the fuel-filler doorand Wide Open door.

The Wide Open doors open nearly 180° to allowaccess to the rear of the cab.

1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.

2. From the outside, pull the door handle �1toward you.

LPD0278 LPD0266



From the inside, pull the inside door handle to-ward you. The door will unlock automatically.

3. Open the door to the desired position.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if soequipped)

● All doors lock automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when thetransmission is placed in the P (Park) posi-tion.

The automatic unlock function can be de-activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-vate the automatic door unlock system, performthe following procedure:

1. Close all doors.


3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,push and hold the power door lock switch tothe position (UNLOCK) for more than5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator willflash twice. When deactivated, the hazardindicator will flash once.

LPD0267 LPD0265



5. The ignition switch must be placed in theOFF and ON position again between eachsetting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac-tivated, the doors do not unlock when the trans-mission is placed in the P (Park) position. Tounlock the door manually, use the inside lockknob or the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side).

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(Crew Cab models only)Child safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-mits radio waves when the buttons arepushed. The FAA advises radio wavesmay affect aircraft navigation and com-munication systems. Do not operate theremote keyless entry keyfob while onan airplane. Make sure the buttons arenot operated unintentionally when theunit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on theinterior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped),and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfobfrom outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigationsystem, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”in this section. For vehicles with navigation sys-tem, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audioand phone systems” section in this manual.

LPD0242

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(if so equipped)



Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance ofapproximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. Theeffective distance depends upon the conditionsaround the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged.

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob, which containselectrical components, to come intocontact with water or salt water. Thiscould affect the system function.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not change or modify the keyfob.

● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If thekeyfob gets wet, immediately wipe untilit is completely dry.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the keyfob with a keyholder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the keyfob near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field,such as a TV, audio equipment and per-sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209



● When the button is pressed with alldoors locked, the hazard warning lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you press thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warning lights willnot flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicleswithout navigation system, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” later in this section. For ve-hicles with navigation system, refer to “How touse the setting button” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems”section later in this manual. Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed with the ignitionswitch in any position except the ON posi-tion.

● The interior lights and puddle lights (if soequipped) turn on and the light timer acti-vates for a period of time when the interiorlight switch is in the DOOR position with theignition switch in any position except the ONposition.

Press the button on the keyfob againwithin 5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing by inserting the key into the ignition switchand placing it in the ON or START position,locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing theinterior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drivepositioner memory

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drivepositioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memorysetting.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.

LPD0210



Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for aperiod of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for a period of time, or

● any button is pressed on the keyfob.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the keyfob once toturn on the interior lights and puddle lights (if soequipped).

For additional information, refer to “Interior light”in the “Instruments and controls” section in thismanual.

Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and light flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screen(if so equipped) will not show the currentmode and cannot be used to change themode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-vious mode and re-enable the displayscreen control.

LPD0211 LPD0262



To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

�1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

�2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and makesure it locks into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

LPD0244

HOOD



FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also causethe Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container on atruck bed liner, rubber truck bed mat, orother insulating material. Static elec-tricity can cause an explosion of flam-mable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicleor trailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler doorlabel can operate on E-85. Fuel systemor other damage can occur if E-85 isused in vehicles that are not designedto run on E-85.

● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properlytightened. It may take a few driving tripsfor the message to be displayed. Failureto tighten the fuel-filler cap properlyafter the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-pears may cause the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

LPD0263

FUEL-FILLER DOOR



● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.If the light illuminates becausethe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,tighten or install the cap and continueto drive the vehicle. The lightshould turn off after a few driving trips.If the light does not turn off after afew driving trips, have the vehicle in-spected by a NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionin this manual.

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

For additional information, see “Fuel recommen-dation (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)” and“Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion in this manual.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise toremove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook �1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until asingle click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warningThe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in theodometer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightenedcorrectly after the vehicle has been refueled. Itmay take a few driving trips for the message to bedisplayed. To turn off the warning, perform thefollowing:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

LPD0325 LRS2005



3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but-ton �A on the instrument panel located be-hind the steering wheel for about 1 secondto turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning�B after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

TILT OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust thesteering wheel up or down to the desired posi-tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheelin place.

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust thebrake and accelerator pedal position away fromthe driver �1 or toward the driver �2 .

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-justed separately.

WARNING

Do not adjust the pedal position whiledriving. You can lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

LPD0254 LPD0255

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if soequipped)



CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with yourfoot on the pedal.

�1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

�2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

�3 To block glare from the side and front, swingdown the sub-sun visor (if so equipped).

�4 Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)in or out as needed.

Type ALPD0273

Type BLPD0264

SUN VISORS



CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visorforcedly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover (if soequipped). Some vanity mirrors are illuminatedand turn on when the mirror cover is open.

Type AWPD0168

Type BLPD0257



REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position �1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position �2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims during night time conditions and ac-cording to the intensity of the headlights of thevehicle following you. The automatic anti-glarefeature is activated when the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-matic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors�1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A

With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, press the button as described:

● To turn off the anti-glare feature, pressthe button. The indicator light will turnoff.

● To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressthe button again. The indicator lightwill turn on.


WPD0126Type A

LPD0446

MIRRORS



For more information about the compass andcompass features �2 (if so equipped), see“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

Type BWith the ignition switch in the ON position, pressthe button as described:

● To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,press the button. The indicator lightwill turn off.

● To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,press the button again. The indicatorlight will turn on.


For information on HomeLink� Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see “HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

For information on the compass and compassfeatures �2 , see “Compass display” in the “In-struments and controls” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

Type BLPD0447



Manual control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror can be moved in any directionfor a better rear view.

Electric control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position.

Move the small switch �1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch �2 .

Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)

WARNING

Objects viewed in the convex portion ofthe trailer tow mirror are closer than theyappear. Be careful when changing lanesor turning. Using only the convex mirrorcould cause an accident. Use the othermirrors or glance over your shoulder toproperly judge distances to other objects.

Use the outside mirror remote control to adjustthe top portion of the trailer tow mirror.

WPD0170 LPD0237 LPD0279



The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror can bemoved manually in any direction for a better rearview.

Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it tothe desired position for better visibility while tow-ing a trailer.

WARNING

Do not extend or retract mirrors while driv-ing. You may lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

CAUTION

Driving in tight spaces with mirrors ex-tended may cause damage to the vehicle.

Manual folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

LPD0268Type A

LPD0259



Power folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power foldingmirrors. Manually folding the mirrors candamage the mirrors.

Push the switch to open or close the mirrors.

If one of the mirrors are manually operated orbumped, the mirror body can become loose atthe pivot point. To correct electronic mirror op-eration, cycle the mirrors by pushing the“CLOSE” switch until completely closed, then

push the “OPEN” switch until the mirrors are inthe open position.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirror(Driver’s side only) (if so equipped)The outside mirror will automatically dim duringnighttime conditions to reduce the glare from theheadlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on whenstarting the vehicle. The indicator light on theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminatewhen the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-ing.

To turn off the anti-glare feature, press thebutton on the rearview mirror. The indicator lightwill turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature again, pressthe button on the rearview mirror. The in-dicator light will turn on.

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in this section.

Type BLPD0269 LPD0196



Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

TAILGATE

Opening the tailgate

Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower thetailgate. The support cables hold the tailgateopen.

When closing the tailgate, make sure the latchesare securely locked.

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgatedown, unless equipped with NISSAN’s BedExtender (accessory) or equivalent in theextended position.

For proper truck box loading see “Vehicle loadinginformation” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

LPD0270

TRUCK BOX



Removing the tailgate

1. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION

● The tailgate is heavy. Two peopleshould remove or install it. Be carefulnot to drop it during removal.

● After releasing the support cables, donot let the tailgate rest on the bumper.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

3. Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge.

4. Slide the tailgate out of the right side hinge.

Installing the tailgate1. Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle andinsert into the left side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degreeangle and attach the tailgate support cables.

4. Close the tailgate securely.

Locking the tailgateTo unlock the tailgate, turn the key toward thepassenger side of the vehicle �1 . To lock, turn thekey toward the driver side �2 .

Both the master key and the valet key can beused to lock and unlock the tailgate.

LPD0271 LPD0272



TIE DOWN HOOKS

For your convenience, tie down hooks are placedat each corner of the truck box. These may beused to help secure cargo loaded into the truckbox.

● The weight of the cargo load must be evenlydistributed over both the front and the rearaxles.

● All cargo should be securely fastened withropes or straps to prevent it from shifting orsliding within the vehicle.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

LTI0102

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)



MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, acceleratorand brake pedals, and outside mirrors can bestored in the automatic drive positioner memory.Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) posi-tion.


3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors to thedesired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additional infor-

mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual and “Pedal posi-tion adjustment” and “Outside mirrors” ear-lier in this section.

During this step, do not place the ignitionswitch in any position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memorypositionEach keyfob can be linked to a stored memoryposition (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,press the button on the keyfob. The driv-er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out-side mirrors will move to the memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to thememory switch, the keyfob automaticallyre-links.

Confirming memory storage

● Place the ignition switch in the ON positionand push the SET switch. If the main memoryhas not been stored, the indicator light willcome on for approximately 0.5 seconds.When the memory has stored the position,the indicator light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

LPD0260



● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the memory storage function willbe canceled and must be restarted before astored memory position can be set again.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the memory storage function. Youcan also restart the memory storage functionusing the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

Once the memory storage function has beenrestarted, you can store a memory position.See “Memory storage function” in this sec-tion.

Selecting the memorized positionSet the shift selector to the P (Park) position,then:

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’sdoor, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or

● Place the ignition switch in the ON positionand push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,and outside mirrors will move to the memorizedposition with the indicator light blinking, and thenthe light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTIONThis system is designed so that the driver’s seatwill automatically move when the shift selector isplaced in the P (Park) position. This allows thedriver to get into and out of the driver’s seat moreeasily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

● When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is opened.

● When the driver’s door is opened with theignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

● When the ignition switch is turned fromACC to LOCK with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-tion:

● When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is closed.

● When the driver’s door is closed with theignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

● When the ignition switch is turned fromACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P(Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. For vehicles with a navigation system, see“Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phonesystems” section of this manual. For vehicleswithout navigation system, see your NISSANdealer.

Restarting the entry/exit functionIf the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the entry/exit function. You can also restartthe entry/exit function using the following proce-dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.



SYSTEM OPERATIONThe automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive positioneris operating.

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

● When the seat has already been moved tothe memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

● When the shift selector is moved from P(Park) to any other position.

● When the driver’s door remains open morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled. For vehicles with a navi-gation system, see “Vehicle electronic systems”in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner,audio and phone systems” section of this manual.For vehicles without navigation system, see yourNISSAN dealer.



4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type A)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type B)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-31Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (Type A, B, C, D and E)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Rear audio controls (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-57Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58Information Provided by:


Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81



WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

1. brightness control button (P. 4-13)

2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3)

3. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-3)

4. SETTING button (P. 4-7)

5. TRIP button (P. 4-4)

6. DEST button*

7. ROUTE button*

8. MAP button*

WHA0854

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if soequipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systemsInformation Provided by:


9. GUIDE VOICE button*

10. zoom out button*

11. zoom in button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual(if so equipped).

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if it is hit with a hardor sharp object. If the glass breaks, donot touch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK ANDENTER BUTTONUse the joystick to choose an item on the displayscreen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right tohighlight an item. Then press the ENTER buttonto select the item or perform the action.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-cepts the changes made during setup.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREENWhen you place the ignition switch in the ACC orON position, the system start-up warning is dis-played on the screen. Read the warning andselect the “OK” key by pressing the ENTER but-ton.

If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi-gation system will not proceed to the next step inthe Navigation display.

If you do not touch a button or screen key formore than 1 minute on the system start-up warn-ing screen, the screen will change to the audioscreen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3Information Provided by:


HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON

When the TRIP button is pressed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 →FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audioor OFF → TRIP 1

Each trip display tracks an independent trip anddisplays the following:

● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed - Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting trip 1 and trip 2Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIPbutton to select the TRIP screen to be reset.

● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 1.5 seconds.

Fuel economy

Press the TRIP button to display Average FuelEconomy and Distance To Empty.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show (**.*).

LHA0552 LHA0553



Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly untilthe FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-ther:

● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 1.5 seconds.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position is small, thedisplay just before the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position may continue tobe displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarilychange the display.

Maintenance itemsPress the TRIP button to display maintenanceinformation or set maintenance intervals for thefollowing:

● Engine Oil

● Tire Rotation

● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)

For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tirepressure information” later in this section.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and press the ENTER button todisplay the screen to change the maintenanceinterval.

Select the “Maintenance Schedule”key using thejoystick and move the joystick to right or left to setthe maintenance interval.

LHA0554 LHA0555



Resetting the maintenance interval

The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte-nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome-ters).

Select the “Reset” key using the joystick andpress the ENTER button.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”key and press the ENTER button to display theMAINTENANCE INFORMATION automaticallyat the set maintenance interval.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINEOIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automaticallydisplayed as shown when both of the followingconditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● “Reset” key is selected.

● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set toOFF.

● The maintenance interval is set again.LHA0556 LHA0483



Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press theTRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCEscreen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure”key using the joystick and press the ENTER but-ton.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-TINGS screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle.Move the joystick and press the ENTER button toselect each item to be set.

LHA0557 LHA0558



Display settingsSelect the “Display” key and press the ENTERbutton. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap-pear.

Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness/Contrast” key to adjustthe brightness and contrast of the map back-ground. Use the joystick to adjust the brightnessto darker or brighter and the contrast to lower orhigher.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKbutton or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the“Display Off” turns amber and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after 5 seconds.

WHA0855 WHA0716 LHA0642



To turn the screen on,

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayOff” key. Then set the screen to on by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Hold the button for approximately 2seconds and the message “resuming dis-play” will appear and the “Display Off” keywill be automatically turned on (no amberindicator).

Vehicle electronic systems

Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key byusing the joystick and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMSscreen will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the joystick, thenpressing the ENTER button. The indicator light,box at the left of the selected item, alternatelyturns on and off each time the ENTER button ispressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle:Select so the driver’s seat automatically movesback and returns to the original position for easeof exit and entry.

Remote Unlock Driver’s Door First: Select tochange which doors will unlock first during anunlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless Remote Response — Horn: Selectto turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode usedwhen the LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

LHA0559 LHA0564



NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the displayscreen will not show the current mode. Usethe keyfob to return to the previous modeand re-enable the display screen control.

Keyless Remote Response — Lights: Selectto turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flashmode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK buttonon the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights: Selectto change the sensitivity setting of the automaticheadlights:

● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlightswill come on quicker when the headlightsensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic Headlights Off Delay: Select tochange the setting for the length of time theautomatic headlights remain on after exiting thevehicle.

Speed Dependent Wiper: Select to turn on orturn off the driving speed dependent intermittentwiper function.

Return All Settings to Default: Select tochange all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMSto their default settings.

System settings

Select the “System Settings” key by using thejoystick and pressing the ENTER button. TheSYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.

Language/unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressingthe ENTER button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

LHA0565 LHA0561



You can select the language and unit using thejoystick or pressing the ENTER button.

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by pressing the BACK button orany other mode button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours”or “Minutes” key and move thejoystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKbutton or any other mode button.

Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust theclock to daylight savings time.

ON: Automatically adjusts for daylight savingstime.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

LHA0562 LHA0566



Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The TIME ZONE screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones, depend-ing on the current location.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screenwill appear.

LHA0567 LHA0568 LHA0563



The GPS time (manual time) corresponding tothe selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zonehas been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pressed.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

Guidance voice settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-stick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if theBACK button is pressed, the display will return tothe previous display.

Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-senger’s side vents �1 , center vents �2 , and rearpassengers’ (if so equipped) vents �3 by movingthe vent slide and/or vent assemblies.

WHA1128

VENTS



WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

1. Fan speed control dial2. Front window defroster button3. Rear window defroster button4. Air recirculation button5. Temperature control dial6. Max A/C button7. Air flow control buttons8. Air conditioner ON/OFF button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to selectthe air flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning).

Type AWHA1406

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (Type A) (if so equipped)



— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and the front and rear flooroutlets.

— Air flows mainly from the front andrear floor outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets andthe front and rear floor outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position:Push the button to recirculate air insidethe vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

The air recirculation mode is only functional whenthe air flow control mode is in the following

positions: or .

OFF position:Push the button again to turn air recircula-tion off. Outside air is drawn into the passengercompartment and distributed through the se-lected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. The indicator lightcomes on when the air conditioner is operating.To turn off the air conditioner, push thebutton again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating. The indicator light onthe button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.The indicator light on the button willgo off.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.



1. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.



● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to the rightand the temperature control to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the ve-hicle is shut off, the fan is turned off or theA/C button is used to turn off the compres-sor, even if the air flow control dial is turnedto a position other than the position.This dehumidifies the air which helps defogthe windshield. The mode automati-cally turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the ve-hicle is shut off, the fan is turned off or theA/C button is used to turn off the compres-sor, even if the air flow control dial is turnedto a position other than the position.This dehumidifies the air which helps defogthe windshield. The mode automati-cally turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.




Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.



4. Press the button. The indicator lighton the button will come on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position. The indicator light onthe button will come on. Be sure toreturn the to the OFF position for nor-mal cooling. The indicator light on thebutton will go off. You may also select MAXA/C for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Press the button on. The indicatorlight on the button will come on.


Operating tips

● Keep the windows closed while the air con-ditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting.



Type AWHA0916

Type AWHA0917



Type AWHA0918

Type AWHA0919



Type AWHA1362



WARNING




1. Fan speed control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Air flow control dial6. Rear window defroster switch (if so

equipped)

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning).


— Air flows from center and sidevents and the front and rear flooroutlets.

Type BWHA0535

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (Type B) (if so equipped)



— Air flows mainly from the front andrear floor outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand the front and rear floor outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

The air flow control dial also has intermediatepositions which allow the air flow to be distrib-uted between 2 of the icon positions on the airflow control dial.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position:Push the button to recirculate air insidethe vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

The air recirculation mode is only functional whenthe air flow control mode is in the following

positions: or .

OFF position:Push the button again to turn air recircula-tion off. Outside air is drawn into the passengercompartment and distributed through the se-lected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. A/C will appear on thedisplay when the air conditioner is operating. Toturn off the air conditioner, push the buttonagain. The display will show A/C OFF.


Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defroster switchFor more information about the rear window andoutside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,see “Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch” in the “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

HEATER OPERATIONHeating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating. The indicator light on

the button will go off. ( will ap-pear on the display, if so equipped.)




Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.The indicator light on the button willgo off. ( will appear on the display, if soequipped.)






Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.




● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to the rightand the temperature control to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the ve-hicle is shut off. This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, al-lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-senger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on and A/C will not appear on thedisplay, if so equipped) if the outside tem-perature is more than 36°F (2°C). If inthe mode for more than one minute,the air conditioning system will continue tooperate until the vehicle is shut off. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.



Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.


CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.



4. Push the button. The indicator lighton the button will come on. (A/C willappear on the display, if so equipped.)


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position. The indicator light on

the button will come on. ( willappear on the display, if so equipped.) Besure to return the to the OFF positionfor normal cooling. The indicator light on

the button will go off. ( will ap-pear on the display, if so equipped.) You mayalso select MAX A/C for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button on. The indicatorlight on the button will come on. (A/Cwill appear on the display, if so equipped.)


Operating tips● Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.



AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting.

Type BWHA1079



Type BWHA1080

Type BWHA1081



Type BWHA1082

Type BWHA1471



1. Driver temperature control dial2. A/C ON/OFF button3. Front window defroster button4. Fan speed control dial5. System OFF button6. Rear window defroster button7. Air recirculation button8. Passenger temperature control dial9. DUAL button10. Air flow control buttons11. AUTO button

WARNING




Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature. Driver andpassenger temperatures can be set inde-pendently. Press DUAL to activate dual cli-mate control functions. Turn the passenger’sside temperature control dial to the left orright to set the desired passenger’s tem-perature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

LHA0877

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)



● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from thevents in hot, humid conditions as the air iscooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-function.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the defroster control button toturn the system on. The indicator light in thebutton will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, turn the manual fan control to themaximum position.

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, press the AUTO button to return tothe auto mode.

● When the control is activated, the airconditioner will automatically be turned on atoutside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). If indefrost mode for more than one minute, theair conditioning system will continue to op-erate until the fan control is turned OFF, thevehicle is shut off or the A/C button is usedto turn off the compressor even if an air flowbutton other than is selected. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The air recirculation mode auto-matically turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control dial

Turn the fan speed control dial left or rightto manually control the fan speed or turn thesystem on or off.

Press the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push theAUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, orfloor/defrost mode.

Air flow controlPress the air flow control buttons to manuallycontrol air flow and select the air outlet:


— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the /OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.



The sunload sensor �1 , located on the top centerof the instrument panel, helps the system main-tain a constant temperature. Do not put anythingon or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the PWR (power)/VOL (vol-ume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to theradio with the engine not running, the ignitionswitch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

LIC0836

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM



Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the first timeor the battery has been replaced, the satelliteradio may not work properly. This is not a mal-function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satelliteradio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal orlarge building for satellite radio to receive all ofthe necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception.



AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

LHA0099



CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio withvirtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Micro-soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on the Artist/song titleline on the display.

* Windows� and Windows Media� are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks in the UnitedStates of America and other countries of Micro-soft Corporation of the USA.



Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA1078



Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RWSupported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*201: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.



Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therewill be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.



1. PRESET A·B·C button2. CD eject button3. MENU button4. CD insert slot5. CD button6. FM·AM button

7. TUNE buttons8. RPT button9. PWR button/VOL control knob10. RDM button11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK buttons

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� earlier in this section.

Audio main operation

Power button and VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, then press the PWR (power) button. Ifyou listen to the radio with the engine not running,place the ignition switch in the ACC position. Themode (radio or CD) that was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off resumes play-ing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pressing the PWR button again turns the systemoff.

Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increasevolume or to the left to decrease volume.

MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,BALANCE and CLOCK):

Press the MENU button to change the mode asfollows:

BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio→ BAS

WHA1075



To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe MENU button until the desired mode appearsin the display. Press the SEEK button to adjustBass and Treble to the desired level. You can alsouse the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balancemodes. Fade adjusts the sound level between thefront and rear speakers and Balance adjusts thesound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the MENU button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

NOTE:

If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENUbutton will change the mode as follows:BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK →Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment →Audio → BAS

For more information on setting the clock, see“Clock set” later in this section.

Clock operation

Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis-played; use the SEEK button to turn the clockdisplay on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position, you need toselect the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use theSEEK button to enable CLK ON mode.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly untilCLOCK mode appears; press the SEEKbutton until CLK ON appears.

2. Press the MENU button again; the hours willstart flashing.

3. Press the SEEK button or toadjust the hour.

4. Press the MENU button again; the displaywill switch to the minute adjustment mode.

5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK

button or to adjust the minutes.

6. Press the MENU button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 10 seconds, or press the MENU buttonagain to return to the regular clock display.

Resetting the time

Hold the MENU button down and then press theTUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol-lows:

● If the displayed minutes before the reset arein the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayedbefore the reset will stay the same and theminutes will be reset to :00.

● If the displayed minutes before the reset arein the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayedbefore the reset will advance by one hourand the minutes will be reset to :00.

For example, if the MENU button and theTUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the timedisplayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the displaywill be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressedwhile the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, thedisplay will be reset to 9:00. At the same time thedisplay will return to the audio.

FM/AM radio operationFM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→FM reception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.



TUNE buttons:

Manual tuning

Press the TUNE or button for lessthan 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.

To move quickly through the channels, press and

hold either TUNE or button downfor more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK buttons:

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK or button to seekthrough the frequencies. Seek tuning beginsfrom low to high frequencies, or high to lowfrequencies, depending on which button ispressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-tion. Once the highest broadcasting station isreached, the radio continues in the seek mode atthe lowest broadcasting station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

TUNE (rewind and fast

forward) buttons:

When the TUNE or button ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilerewinding or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK buttons:

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the next track following the presentone starts to play from the beginning.Press several times to skip several tracks.Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-pears in the display window. (When the last trackon the compact disc is skipped, the first track isplayed.)

When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD moves back one track.



SEEK (Scan CDs) button:

Press and hold the SEEK button for morethan 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10seconds of a track on the compact disc. TheSCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans throughall the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEKor button is pressed during the scanmode.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

1 ←→ Normal

1: The track that is currently playing will be re-peated.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

RDM ←→ Normal

RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-ing will be played randomly.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the compact discwill eject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when theCD is loaded with the system on.



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button3. DISP button4. SCAN RPT button5. PRESET A·B·C button

6. CD·DVD button7. RADIO button*8. AUX button9. REAR ON·OFF button10. speaker control button

11. LOAD button12. CD insert slot13. CD eject button14. POWER/VOLUME control knob15. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons16. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE and BAL-ANCE)

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theRADIO button is pressed to accesssatellite radio stations unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio ser-vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

Type AWHA0864



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button3. DISP button4. SCAN RPT button5. PRESET A·B·C button

6. CD button7. FM button8. AM button9. SAT (satellite) button*10. AUX button

11. LOAD button12. CD insert slot13. CD eject button14. POWER/VOLUME control knob15. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons16. Tuning and AUDIO control knob


*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed to access satel-lite radio stations unless optional satel-lite receiver and antenna are installedand an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Type BWHA0865



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button3. Display4. SCAN button5. RPT RDM button

6. H/M button (clock set buttons)7. PRESET A·B·C button8. CD button9. FM AM button10. SAT (satellite) radio button*

11. AUX button12. DISP button13. LOAD button14. CD insert slot15. CD eject button16. POWER/VOLUME control knob17. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons18. Tuning and AUDIO control knob


*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio ser-vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

Type CWHA0866



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button3. Display4. SCAN RPT button5. DISP button

6. H/M button (clock set buttons)7. PRESET A·B·C button8. CD·DVD button9. RADIO button*10. AUX button

11. REAR ON·OFF button12. speaker control button13. LOAD button14. CD insert slot15. CD eject button16. POWER/VOLUME control knob17. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons18. Tuning and AUDIO control knob



Type DWHA0867



1. PRESET A·B·C button2. Display3. DISP/CLOCK button4. SEEK/TRACK button5. CD button

6. RADIO button*7. AUX button8. SCAN RPT button9. CAT FOLDER button10. CD LOAD button

11. CD insert slot12. CD eject button13. PWR/VOL (power/volume) control

knob14. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons15. Tuning and AUDIO control knob



FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER(Type A, B, C, D and E) (if soequipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT or RADIO button

Type EWHA1127



is pressed to select satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, and then push the POWER/VOLUMEor PWR/VOL control knob while the system is offto call up the mode (radio or CD) which wasplaying immediately before the system wasturned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME or PWR/VOL control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME or PWR/VOL con-trol knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andBalance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredmode appears in the display. Turn the Tuningknob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts thesound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock set (Type C and D only)

1. Press and hold the H button to advancehours.

2. Press and hold the M button to advanceminutes.

For setting the clock on Type A and B audiosystems see “Adjusting the time” in this section.

Clock set (Type E only)

1. Press the DISP/CLOCK button until itbeeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. Press the CAT

FOLDER or button or SEEK

TRACK or button, to adjust thehours.

3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again toswitch to the minute adjustment.

4. Press the CAT FOLDER or

button or SEEK TRACK orbutton to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exitthe clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or you may press theDISP/CLOCK button again to return to the regu-lar clock display.

For setting the clock on Type A and B audiosystems see “Adjusting the time” in this section.

DISP (display) button:

The DISP (display) button will show text aboutMP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Disc title ←→ Track title.



To change the default display mode, press theAUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then rotate the knob toselect the following display modes:

Type A, B and E: Disc number ←→ Foldernumber.

Type C and D: Disc title ←→ Track number ←→Track title.

Once the display mode is selected, press theAUDIO knob again to store the setting. If theAUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, thedisplay will refresh with the last selected displaymode setting.

● Disc number mode displays the current discnumber playing in the changer.

● Folder number mode displays the selectedfolder number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.

● Track number mode displays the numberselected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played on the disk.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to anMP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CDwith text is being used), press the DISP button.The DISP button will scroll through the CD text asfollows:

Type A, B, C and D: Track title ←→ Artisttitle ←→ Folder title.

Type E: Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artist title←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number.

To change the default display mode, press theAUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then rotate the knob toselect the following display modes:

Type A, B and E: Disc number ←→ Foldernumber.

Type C and D: Disc number ←→ Folder number←→ Track title ←→ Artist title ←→ Folder title.

Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-DIO knob again to store the setting.

● Disc number mode displays the selecteddisc number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Folder number mode displays the selectedfolder number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Track title mode displays the track title of theMP3/WMA file.

● Artist title mode displays the artist title of theMP3/WMA file.

● Folder title mode displays the folder namegiven to the MP3/WMA folder.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode press theAUDIO button to display mode and press theTUNE button to select the following displaymodes: Channel number ←→ Channel name←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isselected press the AUDIO button again to storethe setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressedafter 8 seconds the display will refresh with thelast selected display mode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.

● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.



● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM/SAT band select (Type B and Conly):

Pressing the FM, AM, FM/AM or SAT radio selectbutton will change the band to either FM, AM orSAT (satellite - if so equipped) radio stations.

When the FM, AM, FM/AM or SAT* radio selectbutton is pushed while the ignition switch is in theACC or ON, the radio will come on at the stationlast played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressedON.

*No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM,FM/AM or SAT radio select button is pressed, the

compact disc will automatically be turned off andthe last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

FM/AM/SAT band select (Type A, D and Eonly):

Pressing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressedON.

*No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the RADIO button ispressed to access satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pressed, the compact disc will auto-matically be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FOLDER·CAT

button (Type A, B, C and

D only):

Manual tuning

To manually tune the radio, press the

TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or , orturn the tuning knob to right or left.


hold either the or button down formore than 1.5 seconds.

CAT FOLDER (tuning)

button (Type E only):

Manual tuning

To manually tune the radio, press the CAT

FOLDER button or , or turn the tun-ing knob to right or left.




hold either the or button down formore than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK button:

Seek tuning

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

To seek quickly through the channels, press andhold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5seconds. When the button is released the radiowill seek to the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning (Type C only):

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing theSCAN button again during this 5 second periodwill stop scan tuning and the radio will remaintuned to that station. If the SCAN button is notpressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves tothe next station.

SCAN RPT tuning (Type A, B and D only):

Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop scan tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPTbutton is not pressed within 5 seconds, scantuning moves to the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the LOAD or button,then press one of the CD insert slots (1 – 6) .Insert the compact disc into the slot with the labelside facing up. The compact disc will be guidedautomatically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.



If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing thePOWER/VOLUME or PWR/VOL control knobwill start the compact disc.

LOAD button (Type A, B, C and D only):

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press theLOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing a CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theLOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

LOAD button (Type E only):

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pressthe button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-lect the loading slot by pressing a CD insertselect button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press andhold the button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button (Type B, C and E only):

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.

CD·DVD button (Type A and D only):

Press the CD·DVD button to toggle the radiobetween CD and DVD modes.

When the CD·DVD button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the CD·DVD button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded with the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

For more information on the DVD system see“Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later in thissection.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the track being played re-turns to its beginning. Press several times to skip

back through tracks. The compact disc will goback the number of times the button is pressed.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is playing, the next track will start toplay from its beginning. Press several times toskip through tracks. The compact disc will ad-vance the number of times the button is pressed.(When the last track on the compact disc isskipped through, the first track will be played.)

TUNE/FOLDER·CAT

button (Type A, B, C and

D only):

CD:

● While playing a CD, press and hold the

TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button orto fast forward or rewind a track on a CD.

MP3 CD:

● While playing an MP3 CD, press the

TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button orto scan backward or forward through avail-able folders.

● Press and hold the TUNE/FOLDER·CAT

button or to fast forward or re-wind a track on an MP3 CD.



CAT FOLDER button

(Type E only):

CD:

● While playing a CD press the CAT FOLDER

button or to fast forward or re-wind a track on a CD.

MP3 CD:

● While playing an MP3 CD, press the CAT

FOLDER button or to scanbackward or forward through available fold-ers.

● Press and hold the CAT FOLDER

button or to fast forward or re-wind a track on an MP3 CD.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

SCAN/RPT button (Type A, B, D and Eonly):

When the SCAN/RPT play button is pressedwhile the compact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

RPT RDM button (Type C only):

When the RPT RDM play button is pressed whilethe compact disc is played, the play pattern canbe changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

REAR ON·OFF (if so equipped):

Pressing the REAR ON·OFF button for less than1.5 seconds turns the rear seat audio controlleron. REAR CONT ON will display. Pressing itagain will turn the rear seat audio controller off.REAR CONT OFF will display. If the vehicle is notequipped with a rear seat audio controller, thedisplay will show “REAR AV N/A”.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button(Type A and D only):

Press the button to turn the rear speakersoff and the headphones on. Press the but-ton again to turn rear seat speakers back on andthe headphones off.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.



All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 20 seconds or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while a compactdisc is playing, the compact disc will eject andthe last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.

AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack �1 is located below the air condi-tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack acceptsany standard analog audio input such as from aportable cassette tape player, MP3 player or alaptop computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend thedisc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

WHA0869 LHA0049



● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

1. Volume control switch2. Phone operation switch3. Power on and MODE select switch4. Tuning switch

Type AWHA0611

Type BWHA0612



STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

If you have the Type A switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe POWER switch to turn the audio system onor off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE-SET B → PRESET C → CD* → DVD** (if soequipped) → AUX***.

*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

**This mode is only available when a DVD isloaded into the DVD player.

***This mode is only available when a compatibleauxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), push the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change to the nextpreset station in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-tween selections. If there is a blank interval within1 program or there is no interval between pro-grams, the system may not stop in the desired orexpected location.

Change disc (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc upor down.



1. VOL (volume) control button2. MODE select button3. speaker control button4. NEXT button5. SEEK button6. Headphone jacks

7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*

*Red transmitters will be visible wheninfrared headphones are on.

REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if soequipped)The headphones symbol illuminates on the frontdisplay when the rear audio controls are on. Twoheadphone jacks are provided so two rear seatpassengers may listen to the audio system pri-vately.

The rear volume controls can only increase thevolume to the level at which the front radio volumecontrol is set.

One or two infrared headphones are included ifthe vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertain-ment system. Most portable radio headphoneswork with the rear audio controls.

VOL (volume) button:(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press this button to turn the rear speakersoff and headphones on. Press this buttonagain to turn rear seat speakers back on andheadphones off.LHA0322



MODE button:The MODE button allows the rear passengers tochange between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX.The media options are listed on the face plate ofthe rear audio controls. When a source of mediais selected, the media label will be illuminated.

SEEK button:

In AM or FM mode, the SEEK button allows therear seat passengers to find the next radio stationup or down the station band frequency.

In CD mode, the SEEK button allows the rearpassengers to find the next or previous selectionon the CD.

NEXT button:

When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM orFM mode, the radio will change to the next preset.

The NEXT button does not function while in SATradio mode or when playing a DVD or CD.

ANTENNAThe antenna cannot be shortened, but can beremoved. When you need to remove the antenna,turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock-wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specificationusing a suitable tool such as an open-endwrench. The antenna rod tightening specificationis 3.4 – 3.6 N·m (30 – 32 in-lb). Do not use pliersto tighten the antenna as they can leave marks onthe antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot behand tightened to the proper specification.

CAUTION

Always properly tighten the antenna rodduring installation or the antenna rod maybreak during vehicle operation.

WARNING

● The Mobile Entertainment System isdesigned for rear seat passenger view-ing only.

● The driver must not attempt to operatethe Mobile Entertainment System whilethe vehicle is in motion so that full at-tention may be given to vehicleoperation.

LHA0389

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)



CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaningthe Mobile Entertainment System com-ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-ing solutions.

Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)].

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do notoperate the system more than 15 minutes withoutstarting the engine.

1. EJECT button2. DVD slot3. ENTER button4. POWER on/off button5. MODE button6. Input jacks7. STOP button8. PLAY/PAUSE button9. MENU button10. DISPLAY button11. NAVIGATION keys

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYERCONTROLSRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

LHA0316



1. POWER button2. STOP button3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-

OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button4. TITLE button5. ENTER button

6. DISPLAY button7. MODE button8. SUBTITLE button9. AUDIO button10. ANGLE button11. CLEAR button12. PAUSE button13. PLAY button14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button15. MENU button16. NAVIGATION keys17. BACK button18. NUMERIC KEYPADREMOTE CONTROLRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

FLIP-DOWN SCREENThe flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-trol receiver �1 located at the bottom of thescreen.

LHA0317

LHA0315



CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass screen breaks,do not touch it. Doing so could result inan injury.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

Headphones

Power ON/OFF:

Press the power button to turn the headphoneson or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned offin 30 seconds if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, keep the power supply turned off whennot in use.

NOTE:

For optimum infrared headphone perfor-mance, increase the volume on the rearseat controller to the maximum level andadjust the infrared headphone volume us-ing the volume control on the headphones.Using a lower volume setting on the rearseat controller can cause static noise in theinfrared headphones.

SAA0720 SAA0721



PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC(DVD)

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

The driver must not attempt to wear the head-phones while the vehicle is in motion so that fullattention may be given to vehicle operation.

While playing video CD media, this DVD playerdoes not guarantee complete functionality of allvideo CD formats.

With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-pendently of the front seat.

Press the CD·DVD button located on the frontcontrols to hear the sound of the DVD playthrough the speakers.

Press the REAR ON·OFF button located on thefront controls to disable or enable rear seat audiocontrols. For more information on rear seat audiocontrols see, “Rear Audio Controls” earlier in thissection.

Pressing the button on the front controlsturns the rear speakers on or off and enables ordisables the wireless headphones .

It is possible to operate the DVD player by remotecontrol.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cablesare necessary. You can use them in almost all theranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to usethe headphones in the front seat.)

POWER on/off button:

With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ONposition, press the POWER button to turn theDVD player on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, theDVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Press the MODE button to select Audio/Videosource between DVD and AUX input (input jackson the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =Video input).

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper leftcorner of the display for 4 seconds once theMode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary inputjacks” in this section.

or PLAY:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PLAY button on the remote control ispressed, the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly showon the upper left corner of the display.



FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Remote control only):

Press the FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSEbuttons to carry out the fast forward or fast re-verse presentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Press the FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSEbuttons again or PLAY button to resume thenormal play speed.

NEXT

CHAPTER/PREVIOUS

CHAPTER (Remote con-

trol only):

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button ispressed while the DVD is playing, the programnext to the present one will start to play from itsbeginning. Press several times to skip throughprograms. The DVD will advance the number oftimes the button is pressed. When the(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, theprogram being played returns to its beginning.Press several times to skip back through pro-grams. The DVD will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

or PAUSE:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PAUSE button on the remote control ispressed, the player will pause playing of themedia. In pause mode, the player will showon the upper left corner of the display until theplayer is changed to another mode.

STOP:

Press the STOP button once to stop playing themedia. The display will show in the upperleft corner of the display for 4 seconds, and thelast disc position will be stored. When the PLAYbutton is pressed again, it will resume at thestored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pressed again when theplayer is already in Stop mode, it will reinitializethe pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect,it will ignore the last stored disc position andupon receipt of the next play message, will beginat the Title Menu or at “the beginning of the disc”.

EJECT:

When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVDloaded, it will be ejected.

The display will show the EJECT symbol inthe upper left corner of the display for 4 secondsonce the EJECT button is pressed.

If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show“NO DISC”.

If the DVD comes out and is not removed within25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot toprotect it.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2seconds, the display menu will appear on thescreen.

● The display menu will remain on the screenfor 10 seconds if no subsequent controlactivations occur.

● Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigatewithin the display menu and use ENTER toselect the item.

● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-plate for longer than approximately 2 sec-onds while in the display menu will reset thedisplay characteristics to their nominal val-ues. (Faceplate feature only)



If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate ispressed for more than 2 seconds, the mediatrack/time information will be displayed along thebottom of the display. Pressing the DISPLAYcontrol for more than 2 seconds will remove themedia track/time information from the display.(Faceplate feature only)

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI-GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re-verse and fast forward, and the display will

show , , and respec-tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4seconds. (Faceplate feature only)

If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of theNAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track and slow

forward, and the display will show ,and a forward arrow symbol respectively in theupper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.(Faceplate feature only)

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATIONKEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-lect MENU items.

In the display menu, press the ENTER button toselect items for modification, as per the on-screen instructions.

MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENUbutton is pressed, the DVD menu will appear onthe screen. Use the Navigation Keys to navigatewithin the menu and use ENTER to select theitem.

Press the MENU button again to return to PLAYmode.

TITLE (Remote control only):

Press the TITLE button to return the DVD mediato the “title” of the DVD.

Press the TITLE button again to return to theprevious stop point and play.

BACK (Remote control only):

Press the BACK button to exit the current activemenu and return to the previous menu.

SUBTITLE (Remote control only):

Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitleselection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cyclethrough each available subtitle.

AUDIO (Remote control only):

Press the AUDIO button to call up the audiomenu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cyclethrough each available audio track.

ANGLE (Remote control only):

Press the ANGLE button to call up the cameraangle menu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cyclethrough each available angle.

CLEAR (Remote control only):

Press the CLEAR button to clear all numericinputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the3-second timer.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remotecontrol only):

Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly accessdisc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting theirnumeric value.



Use the “≥10” button to input numbers greaterthan or equal to 10. Up to three digits can beinputted when selecting the chapter/title/tracknumber.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons willcontinuously shift the previously input number tothe “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.

The operator can cancel the inputchapter/title/track number by actuating theCLEAR control prior to the expiration of the3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVDdiscs which correspond to them.

Auxiliary input jacksThe auxiliary input jacks are located on the controlpanel. Compatible devices such as video games,camcorders and portable video players can beconnected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-tion purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

To view the compatible device connected to theAUX jacks, press the MODE button. For moreinformation, see “Mode select button” earlier inthis section.

CARE AND MAINTENANCEUse a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your NISSAN Mobile EntertainmentSystem (DVD player face, screen, remote control,etc.).

Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)].

Do not attempt to operate the system in extremehumidity conditions (less than 10% or more than75%).

CAUTION

● Do not use any solvents or cleaningsolutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on the moni-tor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-tor screen as it may become dirty ordamaged.

HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional recordcleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

LHA0049



● A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

● Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may notbe read properly.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on anyside of the DVD.

● Do not store the DVD in locations with directsunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

● Always place discs in the storage case whenthey are not being used.

● Do not put on any sticker or write anythingon either surface of the DVD.

DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVDs as they maycause the DVD player to malfunction:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.

● DVDs with a region code other than“1”. The region code �A is displayed ina small symbol printed on the top ofthe DVD �B .

● DVDs that are not round.

● DVDs with a paper label.

● DVDs that are warped, scratched, orhave unequal edges.

● Recordable digital video discs(DVD+R).

● Rewritable digital video discs(DVD+RW).

If a DVD with a paper label is used andbecomes jammed, you may be able to resetthe unit and eject the jammed disc with thefollowing procedure:

1. Record the radio presets.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal fromthe battery for five minutes.

3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-nal.

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD hasbeen ejected. If it has not, try to ejectthe DVD by pushing the eject button.

LHA0484



5. If the disc cannot be ejected see yourNISSAN dealer for further assistance.

6. Re-program the radio presets.

Remote control and headphonesbattery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

● Size AA (remote control)

● Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends onthe batteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, close the lid se-curely.

● If you will not be using the remote control forlong periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions atextremely close distances to the DVD playeror not at all.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● An improperly disposed battery can harmthe environment. Always confirm local regu-lations for battery disposal.

LHA0318 SAA0723



● When changing batteries, do not let dust oroil get on the remote control and head-phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedfor any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit theuse of cellular telephones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO



WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

WHA0878

BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM (if so equipped)



module when the ignition switch is placed in theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.



BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensedto Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the Bluetooth� PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the amber light on the overhead console illumi-nates and the system is ready to accept voicecommands. If the button is pressed beforethe initialization completes, the system will an-nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready”and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak acommand.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press the button on the steeringwheel at any time. Whenever the VR sessionis cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel.



● To speed the operation you can say multiplecommands. For example, press thebutton then say “Phonebook, New entry”rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voicefeedback prompt then say “New entry”.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred.

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-able when using the “Call International”command and the “Send” command duringa call).

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when usingthe “Call International” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (availableonly when storing a phone book number).

● You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”at any time in any position of the phonenumber (available only when using “Call In-ternational” command).

See “List of voice commands” and “Interna-tional” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at anytime. Please use the “Help” command to getinformation on how to use the system.



CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See “Listof voice commands” and “During a call”later in this section for more information.

PHONE/END

Press the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTEDThe following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” in this section.

Choosing a languageYou can interact with the Bluetooth� Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” later in thissection.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). Use the following chart to selectthe language.

NOTE:

You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press(PHONE/SEND)

to select

Press(PHONE/END)

to selectEnglish Spanish FrenchSpanish English FrenchFrench English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

WHA0879



Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Setup” �A

“Pair phone” �B

“New phone” �C

Initiate from handset �D

Name phone �E

Assign priority �F

Choose ringtone �G

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Setup” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” �B . The system acknowl-edges the command and announces thenext set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone” �C . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset �D .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemodel. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for thephone �E .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level�F . The priority level determines whichphone is active when more than one pairedBluetooth� phone is in the vehicle. Followthe instructions provided by the system or

refer to “Setup” later in this section for moreinformation on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to selecta custom ring tone �G . Follow the instruc-tions provided by the system or refer to“Setup” later in this section for more infor-mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” �A

Number (speak digits) �B

“Dial” �C

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10digits or any special characters.

3. Say the number you wish to call starting withthe area code in single digit format �B . If thesystem has trouble recognizing the correctphone number, try entering the number inthe following groups: 3-digit area code,



3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “fivefive five” as the 1st group, then “one twoone” as the 2nd group, and “three three fivefour” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than10 digits or any special characters, say “In-ternational”. See “How to say numbers” inthis section, for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” �C . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

“Phone Book”

“Memo Pad”

“Setup”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commandscurrently available any time the system is waitingfor a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,you can talk ahead by saying more than onecommand at a time. For example, say, “Call fivefive five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone bypressing the button on the steering wheel.However, if you press the button when thesystem is waiting for a response from you it willend the VR session.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

Name (speak name) �A


“Redial” �C

“Call Back” �D

Name (speak name) �A

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.



See “Phone book” later in this section to learnhow to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.


When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”in this section for more details.

“Redial” �C

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” �D

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

International

For dialing more than 10 digits or any specialcharacters, please say “international”. When thesystem acknowledges the command, the systemwill prompt you to speak the number.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers, “*” or “#” duringa call. For example, if you were directed todial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-mand again to return to a hands-free callthrough the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.



NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.

“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phone Book”

“New Entry” �A

“Edit” �B

“Delete” �C

“List Names” �D

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system. Each name canhave up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-ated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” �A

Use the New Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and youconfirm it is correct, the system asks for a location(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber. The system then asks if you would like tostore another location for the same name. If youdo not wish to store another location, the systemends the VR session.



“Edit” �B

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phonenumber to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asksyou for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber, then announces that the entry has beenstored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete” �C

Use the Delete command to erase one entry fromthe phone book, all entries from the phone book,the current redial number or the current call backnumber.

To delete entries from the phone book, say aname or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-tem.

The system acknowledges the command andasks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call backnumber, say “redial number” or “call back num-ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, thesystem deletes them without asking for confirma-tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying todelete, the system says so and ends the VRsession.

“List names” �D

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record” �A

“Play” �B

“Delete” �C

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voicememos, each up to 20 seconds long.



“Record” �A

The system announces “Recording” and a tonesounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the orbutton on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to endthe VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wishto record over the oldest memo.

“Play” �B

The system plays back all the memos in the orderof newest to oldest. The system ends the VRsession.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an-nounces “No messages to play.” The systemends the VR session.

“Delete” �C

The Delete command erases all memos. Thesystem asks you to confirm this action beforedeleting all memos.

“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone” �A

“List Phone” �B

“Select Phone” �C

“Change Priority” �D

“Delete Phone” �E

“Select Ringtone” �F

“Bluetooth Off” �G

Use the Setup command to change options as-sociated with the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

“Pair phone” �A

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat-ible phone to the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled. Also, see“Pairing procedure” in this section for ad-ditional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair asixth phone, the system announces that you mustfirst delete one phone or replace an existingphone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already beenpaired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-nounces the name the phone is already using.The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from thefollowing commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing proce-dure” in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announcesthe names of the phones already paired andasks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone youwish to replace, the pairing procedure willbegin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” in thissection.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone” �B

Use the List Phone command to hear the namesof the phones currently paired. If no phones arepaired, the system announces, “No pairedphones to list.” The system then ends the VRsession.



“Select phone” �C

Use the Select Phone command to select aphone of lesser priority when two or more phonespaired with Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone andconfirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selectedphone remains active until the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position or you select a newphone.

“Change priority” �D

Use the Change Priority command to change thepriority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac-tive when more than one paired Bluetooth�phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the activephone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used foranother phone, the two phones will swap prioritylevels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C toLevel 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” �E

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aspecific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phonesalready paired with the system and their prioritylevel. The system then gives you the option todelete a specific phone, all phones or listen to thelist again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones,the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also bedeleted.

“Select ringtone” �F

Use the Select Ringtone command to select thetone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call isreceived.

The system announces the name of the activephone and asks you to choose from the followingcommands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtoneand asks if you would like to select that tone.If you say “No”, the system plays the nextringtone available and continues to cyclethrough the ringtones until you select one orquit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirmyour wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off” �G

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off theBluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System.

When the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is off, you will not be able to make or receivecalls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, youwill not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and accessSetup.



SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will usememory A to store the model. If memory A is inuse and memory B is available, the system willuse memory B to store the model. If both of thememory locations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location shouldbe overwritten.

Training procedureThe procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier inthis section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.Follow the instructions to register yourname.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrasesDuring the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes



● No

● select ring tone

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● Home

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” in this section.2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.



5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Using four wheel drive (4WD)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Information Provided by:


Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38



WARNING


● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates,doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)closed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withone of these open, follow theseprecautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the lift gate or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and drivingInformation Provided by:


● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-ger cars to make them capable of performing in avariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allowingyou to anticipate problems. However, they are notdesigned for cornering at the same speeds asconventional two-wheel drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed to per-form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If atall possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautionslater in this section.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Starting and driving 5-3Information Provided by:


Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted. After your tires are inflated to therecommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pressuregauge to check the tire pressure.

● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap-pears in the vehicle information display whenthe low tire pressure warning light is illumi-nated and low tire pressure is detected. TheCHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns offwhen the low tire pressure warning lightturns off.

● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningdoes not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate a TPMSmalfunction.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen.The order of the tire pressure figures dis-played on the screen does not correspondwith the actual order of the tire position. See“Tire pressure information” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner, audio andphone systems” section.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.



WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section for changing aflat tire.)



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.Note: Changes or modification not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void the us-er’s authority to operate theequipment.



For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, include interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and

avoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat beltas outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to doso.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted or improperly belted person issignificantly more likely to be injured orkilled than a person properly wearing aseat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If the right side or left side wheels unintentionallyleave the road surface, maintain control of thevehicle by following the procedure below. Pleasenote that this procedure is only a general guide.The vehicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to theroad surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSRapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurif the tire is punctured or is damaged due tohitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure losscan also be caused by driving on under-inflatedtires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.



Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectthe tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels andtires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airpressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincontrol of the vehicle by following the procedurebelow. Please note that this procedure is only ageneral guide. The vehicle must be driven asappropriate based on the conditions of the ve-hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.

● The vehicle generally moves or pulls inthe direction of the flat tire.

● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

● Do not rapidly release the acceleratorpedal.

● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andeither contact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire or see “Changing a flattire” in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONSYour NISSAN is designed for both normal andoff-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forleisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are lesscapable than four-wheel drive models for roughroad driving and extrication when stuck in deepsnow or mud, or the like.



Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

● Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. Off-road vehicles cantip over sideways much more easilythan they can forward or backward.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you may stall. Ifyou drive down them, you may not beable to control your speed. If you driveacross them, you may roll over.

● Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-offor other hazard that could cause anaccident.

● If your engine stalls or you cannot makeit to the top of a steep hill, never at-tempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear andapply brakes to control your speed.

● Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat and fade,resulting in loss of control and an acci-dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a lowgear to control your speed.

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown aroundwhen driving over rough terrain. Prop-erly secure all cargo so it will not bethrown forward and cause injury to youor your passengers.

● Secure heavy loads in the cargo area asfar forward and as low as possible. Donot equip the vehicle with tires largerthan specified in this manual. Thiscould cause your vehicle to roll over

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

● Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengers havetheir seat belts fastened.

● Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher centerof gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

● Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.



● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

● Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

● If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at high speeds.Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehiclehas a higher center of gravity than apassenger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as passenger cars. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly could re-sult in loss of control and/or a rolloveraccident.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,or radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. See“Brake system” later in this section for“Wet brakes”.

● Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

● Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent maintenancemay be required. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.”

WARNING

● Never remove the ignition key or placethe ignition switch in the LOCK positionwhile driving. The steering wheel willlock (for models without NISSAN ve-hicle immobilizer system). This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe ignition lock is designed so the ignitionswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK positionand the key cannot be removed until the shiftselector is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition switch,make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)position.

If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)position, the ignition switch cannot be placed inthe LOCK position.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park)position after the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position or when the ignition switch cannotbe placed in the LOCK position, proceed asfollows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position.

2. Place the ignition switch slightly toward theON position.


4. Remove the key.

The shift selector is designed so it cannot moveout of P (Park) and into any of the other gearpositions if the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position or if the key is removed from theswitch.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni-tion switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ON positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.For models without NISSAN vehicle immo-bilizer system: when the ignition switch isin the OFF position, the steering wheel isnot locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignitionto the LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-tion, turn the steering wheel to the left orright while turning the key to unlock thekey cylinder.

WSD0041



KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluidas frequently as possible, or at least when-ever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Check that all doors are closed.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-tion. See “Warning/indicator lights and au-dible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE



1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switch isturned to the OFF position or if the keyis removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector is in any of the drivingpositions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by placing the ignitionswitch in the START position. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

ENGINE PROTECTION MODEThe engine has an engine protection mode toreduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem-perature becomes too high (for example, whenclimbing steep grades in high temperature withheavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).When the engine temperature reaches a certainlevel:

● The engine coolant temperature gauge willmove toward the H position.

● Engine power may be reduced.

● The air conditioning cooling function may beautomatically turned OFF for a short time(the blower will continue to operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions, ve-hicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can becontrolled with the accelerator pedal, but thevehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed.The transmission will downshift or upshift as itreaches prescribed shift points. You can alsoshift manually.

As driving conditions change and engine coolanttemperature is reduced, vehicle speed can beincreased using the accelerator pedal, and airconditioning cooling function will automaticallybe turned back ON.

STARTING THE ENGINE DRIVING THE VEHICLE



If:

1. The engine coolant temperature is not re-duced.

2. The air conditioning cooling function doesnot turn back ON.

3. The engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light illumi-nates, this may indicate a malfunction. Movethe vehicle off the road in a safe area andallow the engine to cool. If after checking theoil and coolant, the remains on, do notcontinue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer.

The malfunction indicator light (MIL) may alsocome ON. If only it remains on, you do not needto have your vehicle towed, but have it inspectedsoon by a NISSAN dealer. See “Malfunction in-dicator light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-trols ” section of this manual.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shifting iscompleted. Failure to do so could causeyou to lose control and have anaccident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

● Except in an emergency, do not shift tothe N (Neutral) position while driving.Doing so can cause a loss of enginebraking which may result in a collision,serious personal injury or death. In ad-dition, coasting with the transmissionin the N (Neutral) position may causeserious damage to the transmission.



CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK or OFF position.

To move the shift selector:

: Shift while depressing the brake pedal

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting – console

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector out of the P(Park) position.

WSD0187



WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-tor is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage

If the key is turned to the OFF position for anyreason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D(Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to theLOCK position and be removed from the ignitionswitch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position, then the key can be turned to LOCK.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift selector from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, apply theparking brake first, then move the shift selectorinto the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION


Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the shiftselector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

4 (Fourth gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

Do not downshift into the 4 position at speedsover the following and do not exceed the follow-ing speeds in the 4 position.

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.


2WD and AUTO:

71 MPH (115 km/h) w/o tow mode

62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode

4H:





4LO:



1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.


2WD and AUTO:



4H:



4LO:



To move the shift selector:

: Shift while depressing the brake pedal

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting – column

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector out of the P(Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-tor is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or anyD (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to theLOCK position and be removed from the ignitionswitch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position, then the key can be turned to LOCK.

P (Park):

CAUTION


Use the P (Park) shift selector position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift selector from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, apply theparking brake first, then move the shift selectorinto the P (Park) position.

LSD0099



R (Reverse):

CAUTION


Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the shiftselector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the manual shift mode button �A ispressed while driving, the transmission enters themanual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selectedmanually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-played on the position indicator in the meter. Afterpressing the manual shift mode button, the posi-tion indicator first displays M4 (Fourth)

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4←→D

M4 (Fourth):

For driving up or down long slopes where enginebraking would be advantageous.


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4

M4 will be displayed on the position indicator inthe meter.

M3 (Third):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3


M2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.


M1 ←→ M2


WSD0188



M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.

M1 will be displayed on the position indicator onthe meter.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than M4range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shiftsto higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the shift selector to the � (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

● The transmission will automatically down-shift the gears. (For example, if you select the3rd range, the transmission will shift downbetween the 3rd and 1st gears.)

● Moving the shift selector rapidly to the sameside twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Press the manual shift mode button �A to returnthe transmission to the normal driving mode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gearimmediately because of vehicle speed.The transmission will up or down shiftwhen vehicle speed matches the pro-grammed transmission shift points.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion will not up shift to a higher gearthan is manually selected. When thevehicle speed decreases, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down andshifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the shift selector maynot be moved from the P (Park) position even withthe brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).However, for models without the NISSAN vehicleimmobilizer system, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

Console shiftLSD0090



To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key


3. On vehicles equipped with a column shifter,tilt the steering wheel down to the lowestposition.

4. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

5. Use a protective cloth on the end of a smallscrewdriver before inserting it in the shiftlock release slot and pushing down.

6. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position while holding down the shift lockrelease.

7. For models without the NISSAN vehicle im-mobilizer system, turn the key to the ONposition to unlock the steering wheel.

8. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-sired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, please notethat the transmission will be locked in any of theforward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignitionswitch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Thenturn the ignition switch back to the ONposition. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does notreturn to its normal operating condition,have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-sion and repair it if necessary.

Column shiftLSD0101



WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift selector in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and itwill release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON·OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the vehicle information display thenblinks to warn the driver, see “Vehicle infor-mation display” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section.

LSD0158 LSD0159

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)



● If the SET indicator light blinks, push thecruise control ON·OFF switch off and havethe system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control ON·OFF switch is pushed ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-erly set the cruise control system, use thefollowing procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light inthe vehicle information display will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in thevehicle information display will illuminate. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehiclemaintains the set speed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the vehicle information display goesout.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator light and SET indicatorlight in the vehicle information display go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the vehicle information displaygoes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).



To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● For vehicles equipped with , use 4Hor 4L position only when necessary. Four-wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

WARNING

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

CAUTION

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:


– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the shift selector to the N (Neu-tral) position with the brake pedaldepressed, and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.


USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD) (if so equipped)



TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESThe part time 4WD system provides 3 positions(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the desireddrive mode according to the driving conditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitch Position Wheels Driven

Indicator LightUse Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads (Economydrive)

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate trans-fer shift position engaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THESHIFT SELECT TO THE N POSITION INTHIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OP-ERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-coveredroads

Neutral

*1May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic transmis-sion mechanical parking lock, which willallow the vehicle to roll. Do not leave thetransfer shift position in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. With the brake pedal depressed, move

the shift selector to the N position.3. With the brake pedal depressed, de-

press and turn the 4WD shift switch to4LO or 4H.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT EN-GAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LOTO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRSTSTOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSEDTHE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THESHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and tractionis required (for example: on steep grades orrocky, sandy, muddy roads)

*1: Before moving the shift selector from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completedand the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind,not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.



- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch �OFF�.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicatorlights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when4LO is selected. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” later in this section.



The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are three types of drivemodes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicleMUST be stationary, shift the shift selectorto neutral, and depress the brake pedal.The switch must be pushed and turned toselect 4LO.

WARNING

● When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and makesure that the 4WD shift indicator light ison and the ATP warning light goes off.Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-edly move even if the automatic trans-mission is in the P position.

● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-ing and remain illuminated or turn offbefore shifting the transmission intogear. If the shift selector is shifted fromthe “N” position to any other gear whenthe 4LO indicator light is blinking, thevehicle may move unexpectedly.

CAUTION

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

● The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, and coulddamage drivetrain components.Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H isnot recommended.

● The 4LO position provides maximumpower and traction. Avoid raising ve-hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-mum speed is approximately 31 MPH(50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switch whenmaking a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD and 4H) while driving onsteep downhill grades. Use the enginebrake and low automatic transmissiongears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD and 4H) with the rearwheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD position under these conditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

● Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn theswitch ON while the vehicle is stationary andapply the throttle to try to free the vehicle.



● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock thevehicle back and forth between reverse anddrive gears.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under the tires.Then try the recovery procedures above. Tirechains may be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction. 4WD shift switch operations

● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending ondriving conditions.

● If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the 4H or 4LO, youmay feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.

● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-ing a turn, you may feel a slight joltafter the shift selector is shifted to N orP. This occurs because the transferclutch is released and not because of amalfunction.

CAUTION

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switch whenmaking a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch whiledriving on steep downhill grades. Usethe engine brake and low automatictransmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-gine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

● Before placing the 4WD shift switch inthe 4H position from 2WD, ensure thevehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100km/h). Failure to do so can damage the4WD system.

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD0145



4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in thevehicle information display.

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

● The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator lightwill come on.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-tion changes to 2WD when the 4WDshift switch is shifted to the 4H positionat low ambient temperatures, the 2WDmode may be being engaged due tomalfunctioning drive system. If the indi-cator does not return to normal and the4WD warning light comes on, have thesystem checked by the nearest NISSANdealer.

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinkswhen:

Comes on

There is a mal-function in the4–wheel drive

system

Blinksslowly

The difference inwheel rotation is

large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the keyswitch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after theengine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the key switch is ON, the warning light willeither remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.

A large difference between the diameters of frontand rear wheels will make the warning light blinkslowly (about once per two seconds). Changethe 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drivefast.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksslowly during operation or rapidly afterstopping the vehicle for a while, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warninglight turns on.

LSD0147



● When the warning light comes on, the2WD mode may be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especiallycareful when driving. If correspondingparts are malfunctioning, the 4WDmode will not be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is shifted.

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surface roads:


– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the automatic transmissionshift selector to the N position withthe brake pedal depressed, and shiftthe 4WD shift switch to 2WD.


● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking.

The E-Lock system can provide additional trac-tion and should only be used when a vehicle hasbecome or is becoming stuck. This system oper-ates by electronically “locking” the two rear drivewheels together, allowing them to turn at thesame speed. The system is used when it is notpossible to free a stuck vehicle even when usingthe 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles).

When added traction is required, activate theE-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-tem switch” in the “Instruments and Controls”section. Once the system fully engages, the indi-cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON.When the system is activated, both rear wheelswill engage, providing added traction.

The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move toengage the system, and the system will onlyengage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h).Once the vehicle is free, the system should beturned OFF and driving resumed.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabledand the ABS light illuminates when the E-Locksystem is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC lightilluminates when the E-Lock system is ON.

WARNING

● Never leave the E-Lock system ONwhen driving on paved or hard-surfacedroads. Turning the vehicle may result inthe rear wheels slipping and result in anaccident and personal injury. After us-ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-hicle, turn the system OFF.

● Use the E-Lock system only when free-ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO positionbefore using the E-Lock system. Neveruse the E-Lock system on a slipperyroad surface such as snow or ice sur-face. Using the E-Lock system whendriving in these road conditions maycause unexpected movement of the ve-hicle during engine braking, accelerat-ing or turning, which may result in anaccident and serious personal injury.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (ifso equipped)



CAUTION

● After using the E-Lock system, turn theswitch OFF to prevent possible damageto driveline components from extendeduse.

● Do not drive the vehicle at speeds fasterthan 12 mph (20 km/h) when the systemis engaged. Doing so could damagedrivetrain components.

● Do not turn on the E-lock system whilethe tires are spinning. Doing so coulddamage drivetrain components.

WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftselector has been pushed as far forwardas it can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: �A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: �B

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: �C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.


The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.



WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test featureThe ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operationThe ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels areclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly appliesand releases hydraulic pressure. This action issimilar to pumping the brakes very quickly. Youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise from under the hood or feel a vibration fromthe actuator when it is operating. This is normaland indicates that the ABS is operating properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.

● ABLS system uses automatic braking totransfer power from a slipping drive wheel tothe wheel on the same axle with more trac-tion. The ABLS system applies braking tothe slipping wheel, which helps redirectpower to the other wheel.

● On 4WD models the ABLS system operatesin both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode isengaged, the ABLS system operates forboth drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, theABLS system operates on the drive axleonly.

● The ABLS system is always ON. In someconditions, the system may automaticallyturn the ABLS system off. If the system isautomatically turned off, normal brake func-tion will continue. ABLS will function evenwhen the VDC system is turned OFF.

● The ABLS does not operate if both wheelson a drive axle are slipping.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)SYSTEM



WARNING

● The ABLS system helps provide in-creased traction, but will not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering opera-tion or by careless driving or dangerousdriving practices. Reduce vehicle speedand be especially careful when drivingand cornering on slippery surfaces. Al-ways drive carefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSAN ap-proved for your vehicle or are extremelydeteriorated, the ABLS system may notoperate properly. This could adversely af-fect vehicle handling performance, andthe slip indicator light may illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the ABLS system may notoperate properly and the slip indicatorlight may illuminate.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the ABLSsystem may not operate properly andthe slip indicator light may illuminate.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesvarious sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,the VDC System helps to perform the followingfunctions:

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheelslip on one slipping drive wheel so power istransferred to a non slipping drive wheel onthe same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine outputto reduce drive wheel slip based on vehiclespeed (traction control function).

● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOthe indicator light will come on andthe VDC system will be turned off. See “Us-ing four wheel drive (4WD)” earlier in thissection.

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheelsand engine output to help the driver maintaincontrol of the vehicle in the following condi-tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not followthe steered path despite increased steer-ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintaincontrol of the vehicle, but it can not prevent lossof vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-cator in the instrument panel flashes so note thefollowing:

● The road may be slippery or the system maydetermine some action is required to helpkeep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from under thehood. This is normal and indicates that theVDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-ments and controls” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theand indicator lights come on in the instru-ment panel. The VDC system automatically turnsoff when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDCsystem. The indicator illuminates to indi-cate the VDC system is off.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM



When the VDC switch is used to turn off thesystem, the VDC system still operates to preventone drive wheel from slipping by transferringpower to a non slipping drive wheel. Theindicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDCfunctions are off and the indicator will notflash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to onwhen the ignition switch is placed in the offposition then back to the on position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help thedriver maintain stability but does notprevent accidents due to abrupt steer-ing operation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANrecommended for your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling per-formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-cator lights may illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the VDC system may notoperate properly and both theand the indicator lights mayilluminate.

● If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the andindicator lights may illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. This is not a mal-function. Restart the engine after driv-ing onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the VDCsystem may not operate properly andthe indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights mayilluminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.



WARNING

● Always turn and look back before back-ing up. The RSS is not a substitute forproper backing procedures.

● Read and understand the limitations ofthe rear sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather may af-fect the function of the RSS; this mayinclude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

● This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● If your vehicle sustains damage to therear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate measure-ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumperwhen the shift selector is in R (Reverse). Thesystem may not detect objects at speeds above 3mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angularor moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 feet (1.8 m)from the rear bumper with a decreased coveragearea at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer tothe illustration for approximate zone coverageareas). As you move closer to the obstacle, therate of the tone increases. When the obstacle isless than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone willsound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-ary or receding object further than 10 inches(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone

will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys-tem detects an object approaching, the tone willsound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the shiftselector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignitionis ON. The RSS OFF switch on the instrumentpanel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off.To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON, andthe shift selector in R (Reverse). An indicator lighton the switch will illuminate when the system isturned off. If the indicator light illuminates whenthe RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a mal-function in the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bum-per fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumu-lations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects). If the sensors are covered, it will affectthe accuracy of the RSS.

WSD0103

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if soequipped)



FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control (if soequipped) on slippery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.



6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13



TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECKTIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicleinformation display, one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys-tem also displays pressure of all tires (except thespare tire) on the display screen by sending asignal from a sensor that is installed in eachwheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you ofit by the low tire pressure warning light. Thissystem will activate only when the vehicle isdriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Formore details, refer to “Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure information” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audioand phone systems” section and “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergencyInformation Provided by:


WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the automatic transmissionis shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks �1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire�2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools1. Fold up the rear bench seat. Refer to “Fold-

ing the rear bench seat” in the “Safety –Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraintsystem” section of this manual.

WCE0044

In case of emergency 6-3Information Provided by:


2. Unscrew and remove the jack and tool kit. 3. Assemble the two pieces of the jack rod.Find the oval-shaped opening above themiddle of the license plate. Pass theT-shaped end of the jack rod through theopening and direct it toward the spare tirewinch, located directly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

4. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench to forma handle.

5. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod intothe T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged inthe spare tire winch and turn the jack rodcounterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

6. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,reach under the vehicle, remove the retainerchain, and carefully slide the tire from underthe rear of the vehicle.

LCE0093 WCE0150 WCE0151



CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-ing plate on the wheel and then lift thespare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the illustration for the correctplacement and jack-up points for your specificvehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.



2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Thejack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jackas shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until thetire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

WCE0152 LCE0087



Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-hicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mi. (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display (if so equipped) ofthe tire pressure information may showhigher pressure than the COLD tire pres-sure after the vehicle has been driven morethan 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tirepressure increases as the tire temperaturerises. This does not indicate a system mal-function.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WCE0063



WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep allsparks and flames away from thebattery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

JUMP STARTING



WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-tioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (�) to positive(�) and negative (�) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 RPM, and start theengine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WCE0054



WARNING

Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. Attempt-ing to do so may cause transmissiondamage.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant reser-voir cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading andthe illumination of the engine oil pressure/enginecoolant temperature high indicator light), or if youfeel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift selectorto P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (rear) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

● When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by placingthe ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion. This may cause damage to thelock mechanism (if so equipped).

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.

ACE1019



Four-wheel drive modelsNISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or place the ve-hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thetransfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:

● Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

WCE0161Hooks (if so equipped)

LCE0083



● Attach recovery devices only to mainstructural members of the vehicle or therecovery hooks.

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to towor free a stuck vehicle.

● Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

● Always pull the recovery device straightout from the front of the vehicle. Neverpull at an angle.

● Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle except theattachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-vice.

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing orvehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system.

2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Differ-ential (E-Lock) System (if so equipped).

3. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

4. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55km/h) or above 12 MPH (20 km/h) if theE–Lock System is engaged.

6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.



7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6



In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and careInformation Provided by:


REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3Information Provided by:


Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-tion of the air bag system and result inserious personal injury.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affectthe vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-manent discoloration when they contact ve-hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-ener in a location that allows it to hang freeand not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause imme-diate damage and discoloration whenspilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference thatmay result in a collision or injury:

● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver frontposition.

● Use only genuine NISSAN floor matsspecifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model. See your NISSAN dealerfor more information.

● Properly position the mats in the floor-well using the floor mat positioning aid.See �Floor mat positioning aid� in thissection.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-tained with regular cleaning and replaced if theybecome excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR



Floor mat positioning aidThis vehicle includes two driver’s side front floormat brackets and one passenger’s side front floormat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place.Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been speciallydesigned for your vehicle model. The driver’s sidefloor mat has two grommet holes incorporated init and the passenger’s side has one grommethole. Position each mat by placing the floor matbracket hook through the floor mat grommetholes while centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

LAI0009

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5Information Provided by:


TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.



8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40



Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with long ser-vice intervals to save you both time and money.However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’sgood mechanical condition, as well as its emis-sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourselfInformation Provided by:


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the TPMStransmitter grommet seal, valve core and capwhen the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the shift selector inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3Information Provided by:


Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluidlevel is between the MIN and MAX lines on thereservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selector toP (Park)

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



1. Battery2. Fuse/fusible link box3. Transmission dipstick4. Engine oil filler cap5. Brake fluid reservoir6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir7. Air cleaner8. Drive belt location9. Radiator cap10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Engine oil dipstick12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0630

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a pre-diluted mixture of 50% GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze andcoolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

● Never use any cooling system additivessuch as radiator sealer. Additives mayclog the cooling system and causedamage to the engine, transmissionand/or cooling system.

● When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-dilutedto provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-tion is needed due to weather whereyou operate your vehicle, add GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant(blue) concentrate following the direc-tions on the container. If an equivalentcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) isused, follow the coolant manufacturer’sinstructions to maintain minimum anti-freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). Theuse of other types of coolant solutionsother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalentmay damage the engine coolingsystem.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-ant other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-ing Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water will reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. Refer to the Nissan Service andMaintenance Guide for more details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy ofthe factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or

the use of non-distilled water will reduce the lifeexpectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to theNISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide formore details.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator or enginecoolant reservoir cap when the engineis hot. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

LDI0369



CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks �B . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark �A , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI0370 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL



CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap �A by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug�B .

5. Remove the drain plug �B with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

WDI0504



CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter �A .

4. Loosen the oil filter �A with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead to anoil leak and engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. IfGenuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is notavailable, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFmay also be used.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic SATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-tion in driveability and automatic trans-mission durability, and may damage theautomatic transmission, which is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

WDI0505

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID



The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAXdepending on system fluid temperature. Removethe cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can damagethe brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

● Brake fluid is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containersout of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

WDI0256

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID



BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the lowwindshield-washer fluid warning light comes on(if so equipped).

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, liftthe cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount ofwindshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the windshield-washer fluid reser-voir. Do not use the windshield-washerfluid reservoir to mix the washer fluidconcentrate and water.

LDI0374 WDI0405

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames, anelectrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-gen gas generated by the battery is ex-plosive. Explosive gases can causeblindness or injury. Do not allow batteryfluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabricsor painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or injury. After touch-ing a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver asshown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

WDI0224

BATTERY



2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstallthe vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltagecontrol system. This system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the batteryand controls voltage generated by the generator.

WDI0529

WDI0566

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM



The current sensor �A is located near the batteryalong the negative battery cable. If you add elec-trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure toground them to a suitable body ground such asthe frame or engine block area.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Automatic belt tensioner3. Water pump4. Cooling fan5. Air conditioner compressor6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0661

DRIVE BELT



REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped �Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

�1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleanercover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

SDI1895 WDI0712

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER



NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, makesure the air cleaner cover is seated in thehousing and latch the clips.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins�A . Remove the glove box from the openingand let it hang by the cord.

WDI0619



2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove thefilter cover.

NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.The end of the filter with the arrow shouldface the rear of the vehicle. The arrowsshould face downward.

3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slideit over to the right. Insert the second filterinto the housing.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the smallreplacement label and attach it to the glovebox lid.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

LDI0387 LDI0404

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

�2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

�3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

6. Return the wiper to its original position andrelease it until it has made contact with thewindshield.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle�A . This may cause clogging or improper wind-shield washer operation. If wax gets into thenozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin �B .

WDI0408

WDI0629



If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type �A is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type�B is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES



If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0380



5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with a newfuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the glove box to access the fuse boxcover.

3. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

WDI0452 LDI0618



5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anequivalent good fuse �B .

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Extended storage switchIf any electrical equipment does not operate,remove the extended storage switch and checkfor an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used forlong term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-tended storage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replace only theopen fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

Type AWDI0452

Type BLDI0456 LDI2035



How to replace the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, besure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFFposition.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs �1 found on eachside of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from thefuse box �2 .

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT



KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

�1 Open the lid using a coin �A .

�2 Remove the battery �B .

�3 Install a new battery �C with the “+” facingdown.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding thebattery across the contact points will seri-ously deplete the storage capacity.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electricterminals as it could cause a malfunction.

● When changing the battery, do not let dustor oil get on the keyfob.

● There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace onlywith the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

�4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

LDI2026



FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTSReplacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

NOTE:

Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed as shown in thechart.

LIGHTS



● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog lightfor a long period of time as dust, mois-ture and smoke may enter the fog lightbody and affect the performance of thefog light.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. The fog light is accessible in front of thefront tire and behind the bumper.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector �1 .

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re-move.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the foglight assembly. Do not shake or rotate thebulb when removing it. Do not touch theglass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:

To adjust the fog light vertical aim: Accessthe aiming screw from underneath the frontbumper. The aiming screw is located on thebottom of the fog light housing. Turn thescrew clockwise to raise the pattern. Turnthe screw counterclockwise to lower thepattern.

LDI0382



EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assemblyHigh 65 9005 (HB3)Low 55 9006 (HB4)Park/Turn 28/8 3457KSidemarker 3.8 194

Side turn signal light* (if so equipped) — LEDFront fog light (if so equipped) 27.5 880Puddle light (if so equipped) 9 906LFRoom/map lights (front) 6 –Personal lights 8 AL67Footwell (if so equipped) 3.4 158Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 1.8 –Step light (if so equipped) 3.8 194High-mounted stop light/cargo lights* 12.8 912LFRear combination light

Tail/Stop 27/8 3157KBackup (reversing) 18 921LFTurn 27 3156K

Tailgate light (if so equipped) 18 921License plate light 5 W5W

* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.



1. Room/map light (if so equipped)2. Personal lights (if so equipped)3. Step light (if so equipped)4. Puddle light/Side turn signal light (if so

equipped)5. High-mount stoplight/cargo lights6. License plate light7. Rear combination/tailgate light (if so

equipped) assembly8. Fog light (if so equipped)9. Headlight assembly

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installationWDI0409

WDI0263



Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.

Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.

Interior/map lightsLDI0389

Personal lights (If so equipped)LDI0364

Vanity mirror (If so equipped)LDI0385



Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.Step light (If so equipped)

LDI0341

Puddle light (If so equipped)LDI0388

License plate lightWDI0411



If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all 4 tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE warning appears in the ve-hicle information display, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pres-sure of all tires (except the spare tire) onthe display screen by sending a signalfrom a sensor that is installed in eachwheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to“Warning/Indicator Lights and AudibleReminders” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section, “Tire pressure information”in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-tioner, audio and phone systems” section,“Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

Rear combination lightLDI0410

WHEELS AND TIRES



● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label. Donot load your vehicle beyond thiscapacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tirelife, unsafe operating conditionsdue to premature tire failure, orunfavorable handling character-istics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading be-yond the specified capacity mayalso result in failure of other ve-hicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.



Tire and loading information label

�1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

�3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI0485



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire:P265/70R18P275/70R18P275/60R20

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:P265/70R18P275/70R18P275/60R20

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:P265/70R18P275/70R18P275/60R20

240 kPa, 35 PSILDI0393



TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

�1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0394

ExampleWDI0395



�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture.

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

�5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

ExampleWDI0396



�7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the low tire pres-sure warning system.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.



If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installingstudded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installedon P275/60R20 size tires. Installation ofthe tire chains/cables on P275/60R20 sizetires will cause damage to the vehicle. Ifyou plan to use tire chains/cables, youshould install P265/70R18 size tires onyour vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain tensionerswhen recommended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clearpaved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section in this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258



Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


WDI0259



Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, VDC system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibration,headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead to acci-dents and could result in serious per-sonal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,install the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affectthe VDC system and/or interferencewith the brake discs. Such interferencecan lead to decreased braking effi-ciency and/or early brake pad wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.



● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and may dam-age the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.



If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tires be replaced with tires of thesame size, brand, construction and tread pattern.The tire pressure and wheel alignment shouldalso be checked and corrected as necessary.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Care of wheels● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.



MEMO



9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation(without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuelrecommendation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Utili-track™ channel system (if so equipped) . . . . . . 9-16Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Crew Cab Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22King Cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Payload weight capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-42Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-43Information Provided by:


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and LubricantsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 28 gal 23-1/4 gal 105.8 See “Fuel Recommendation (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle Option)” or “Flexible Fuel Ve-hicle (FFV) Fuel Recommendation” later in this section.

Engine oil *7Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt 6.5• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1• Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter

change6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 6.2

Cooling systemWith reservoir 3-1/4 gal 2-5/8 gal 12.2 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *2Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *3Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *5Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5Transfer fluid 2-1/8 qt 1-3/4 qt 2.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended*6Front final drive oil 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8 pt 1.6 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity

SAE 80W-90 *8Rear final drive oil 4-1/4 pt 3-1/2 pt 2.0 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic 75W-140 or API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Vis-

cosity SAE 75W-140 *9Windshield-washer fluid (shared be-tween front and rear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.*2: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or

Genuine NISSAN Matic J AFT will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by theNISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*3: DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.*4: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label” in this section.*6: Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the NISSAN

new vehicle limited warranty.*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.*8: For hot climates, Viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).*9: See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer informationInformation Provided by:


FUEL RECOMMENDATION (withoutFlexible Fuel Vehicle option)

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION


● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Technical and consumer information 9-3Information Provided by:


Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUELRECOMMENDATION (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel Etha-nol, “Regular” unleaded regular gasoline or anypercentage of the two fuels combined.

U.S. government regulations require FuelEthanol dispensing pumps to have a small,square, orange and black label with thecommon abbreviation or the appropriatepercentage for that region.

CAUTION

Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanolmay cause powertrain damage or a loss ofvehicle performance.



General information

This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles (FFV)only. FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuelfiller door label that states Ethanol (E-85) orUnleaded Gasoline Only. This section only cov-ers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuelvehicles.

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door labelcan operate on E-85. Fuel system or otherdamage can occur if E-85 is used in vehiclesthat are not designed to run on E-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel etha-nol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING

● Ethanol vapors are extremely flam-mable and could cause serious per-sonal injury.

● Never have any smoking materials lit inor near the vehicle when removing thefuel filler cap or filling the tank.

● Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent andnever use it near an open flame.

Fuel requirements

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regulargasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI(Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane num-ber 91), or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two.For the best starting and vehicle driveability re-sults, do not continually switch between E-85and unleaded regular gasoline. If you must switchfuels, NISSAN recommends the following:

● do not switch when the fuel gauge indicatesless than 1/4 full

● add more than 5 gallons of fuel

● operate the vehicle immediately after refuel-ing for a period of at least 5 minutes

NOTE:

When the ambient temperature is above90°F (32°C), you may experience hard start-ing and rough idle following start up even ifthe above recommendations are followed.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuit-able for use when ambient temperatures fall be-low 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase inthe time it takes for you engine to start, and adeterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesita-tions) until the engine is fully warmed up.

Fuel consumption

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gal-lon than gasoline, you will experience an increasein fuel consumption. You can expect your fuelmileage to decrease by about 30% compared togasoline operation.

Replacement parts

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle(FFV) are designed to be compatible with etha-nol. Always be sure that your vehicle is servicedwith correct ethanol compatible parts.

CAUTION

Replacing fuel system components withnon-ethanol compatible components candamage your vehicle and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

Maintenance

If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel, followthe correct maintenance log shown in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

CAUTION

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficultyin cold starting and may affect drivability.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183



Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/Csystem oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.



ENGINE

Model VK56DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)Displacement cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)Firing order 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.A/T (in “N” position)Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idle

Spark plugStandard Model FFV ModelDILFR5A-11 DILFR5A-11D

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

18 x 8.0JJ

20 x 8.0JJ

Tires

P265/70R18

P275/70R18

P275/60R20

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall lengthShort wheel base (SWB) in (mm) 224.6 (5,704)Long wheel base (LWB) in (mm) 244.3 (6,204)

Overall width in (mm) 79.5 (2,019)Overall heightKing Cab - SWB 4x2 (S, SV) in (mm) 74.6 (1,896)

4x4 (S, SV) in (mm) 76.1 (1,934)4x4 (Pro-4X) in (mm) 76.6 (1,946)

King Cab - LWB 4x2 (S, SV) in (mm) 74.4 (1,891)4x4 (S, SV) in (mm) 76.0 (1,931)

Crew Cab - SWB 4x2 (S, SV) in (mm) 74.7 (1,898)4x2 (SL) in (mm) 75.1 (1,908)4x4 (S, SV) in (mm) 76.3 (1,939)4x4 (Pro-4X) in (mm) 76.9 (1,954)4x4 (SL) in (mm) 76.7 (1,949)

Crew Cab - LWB 4x2 (S, SV) in (mm) 74.7 (1,898)4x2 (SL) in (mm) 74.9 (1,903)4x4 (S, SV) in (mm) 76.3 (1,939)4x4 (Pro-4X) in (mm) 76.6 (1,946)4x4 (SL) in (mm) 76.4 (1,941)

Front Track18 inch tire in (mm) 67.9 (1,725)20 inch tire in (mm) 68.1 (1,729)

Rear Track18 inch tire in (mm) 67.9 (1,725)20 inch tire in (mm) 68.1 (1,729)

WheelbaseShort wheel base in (mm) 139.8 (3,550)Long wheel base in (mm) 159.5 (4,050)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer-tification label” on

the center pillarbetween the driv-er’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight ratingFront lb (kg)Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0095 WTI0099 WTI0189



TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at thelocation mark (small dimple) using a 0.20 in(5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.Install the license plate holder using the twoscrews provided with the holder.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6-14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WTI0100 WTI0220 LTI0093

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE



WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label.

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.Both the GVWR and GAWR are locatedon the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. See “Measurement of weights” laterin this section.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.

ExampleLTI0152



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

SECURING THE LOADFor your convenience, tie down hooks are placedat each corner of the truck box. These may beused to help secure cargo loaded into the truckbox.

LTI0102



WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury. 1. Side channels

2. Header channel3. Channel sections4. Floor channels

UTILI-TRACK™ CHANNEL SYSTEM(if so equipped)

WARNING

● Properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats into the Utili-track™ chan-nel system. Also, do not attach any ropeor straps directly to the channel. Failureto properly install the tie-down cleats orattaching ropes or straps directly to thechannel can cause the cargo to becomeunsecured. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

The Utili-track™ channel system allows you tomove tie-down clamps in the bed to the bestlocation to secure a load.

The tie-down cleats must be installed so theclamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail.If the tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches,it will not be flush with the rail and cannot beproperly tightened. The bolt in the center of thecleat must be tightened hand tight (20 – 40 inchpounds)

LTI0107



Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat peri-odically during a trip to make sure the center bolthas not become loose.

Install the tie-down cleat as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by slidingthem out the back of the truck bed. Properlystore the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicu-lar to the channel as shown. Then rotate thecleat clockwise 90° and slide it to the de-sired location.

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottomfully seat into the channel detents.

LTI0103

LTI0104



5. There should be no gap between the bottomof the cleat and the top of the channel.Tighten the center bolt hand tight (20-40inch pounds).

WTI0124



CAUTION

● Install only one cleat per section ofchannel.

● Applying loads at angles to the cleatsgreater then 45° or loads greater than150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or200 lbs. (side channels) may causedamage to the channel or bed.

LTI0106



WARNING

Do not install accessories over the gapbetween the front and rear side channels.Doing this could affect the rear structurein certain rear impacts, which could resultin serious injury.

CAUTION

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to prevent it from sliding or shifting.Use the channel end stoppers to help se-cure items in the channels from sliding offthe end of the truck bed.

Channel end stoppersThe channel end stoppers should be used to helpprevent accessories installed in the channelsfrom sliding or shifting off the end of the truckbed.

They must be installed so they are properlyseated in the detents in the channel.

1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installationLTI0123 WTI0119



Install the channels end stoppers as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by slidingthem out the back of the truck bed. Properlystore the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the endstopper with the provided wrench and insertit into the channel.

3. Position the end stopper to the desired lo-cation on the channel so the nubs on thebottom of the end stopper fully seat into thechannel detents.

4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the endstopper with the provided wrench.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.



CREW CAB MODELSCrew Cab short wheel base models shouldnot be used to carry a slide-in camper.

KING CAB MODELSThis information is provided for you to properlyinstall a slide-in camper and is based on theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationregulations. It is recommended that, before in-stalling the camper, you carefully read the follow-ing information and ensure that the campermeets the specifications.

This information may not apply to some Canadamodel vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLESSome vehicles are equipped with commercial orcamper bodies. However, this Owner’s Manualdoes not cover these options. For further infor-mation, please refer to the body manufacturer’sinstruction manual.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OFGRAVITY

The illustration indicates the recommendedcargo center of gravity location.

King Cab short wheel base:

L1 = 43.9 in (1,115.7 mm)

Crew Cab long wheel base:

L1 = 47.9 in (1,215.7 mm)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. If aload is too far back, it can affect handlingcharacteristics. If a load is too far forward,the front axle may be overloaded.

WTI0195

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADINGINFORMATION



When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper,the total cargo load of the truck consists of thecamper manufacturer’s weight figure, plus:

● the weight of installed additional camperequipment not included in the campermanufacturer’s weight figure,

● the weight of camper cargo,

● and the weight of occupants in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed thetruck’s pay load weight rating and the camper’scenter of gravity should fall within the truck’srecommended center of gravity location wheninstalled.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading can ad-versely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance and may lead toaccidents.

PAYLOAD WEIGHT CAPACITYThe vehicle payload weight capacity shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label, see “Tireand Loading Information label” in this section,indicates the maximum total weight of passen-gers, optional equipment (air conditioning, trailerhitch, etc) and cargo that your vehicle is designedto carry.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that youdo not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for your vehicle. See ’’Vehicle LoadingInformation’’ earlier in this section for details.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures.See the Tire and Loading Information label.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.

LTI0129



WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) should not exceed the value specifiedin the following “Towing Load/Specification”chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0161

TOWING A TRAILER



Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -15 percent of the total trailer load or use thetrailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu-facturer. The tongue load must be within themaximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If thetongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper tongue load.

King pin loadWhen using a 5th wheel hitch, keep the tongueload between 15 - 25 percent of the total trailerload within the maximum king pin load limitsshown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the king pin loadbecomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper king pin load.

WTI0160



Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue/king pin load, use the following proce-dure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, usethe following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the�Towing Load/Specification� chart foundlater in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg).

CA0036



● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -7,100 lb. (3,220 kg).

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification� chart -15,100 lb. (6,848 kg).

● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-ing Load/Specification� chart - 9,200 lb.(4,173 kg).

7,100 lb. (3,220 kg) GVWR

– 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg) GVW

= 900 lb. (408 kg) Available for tongue/king pin weight

15,100 lb. (6,848 kg) GCWR

– 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg) GVW

= 8,900 lb. (4,036 kg) Capacity available fortowing

900 lb. (408 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 8,900 lb. (4,036 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within thetrailer tongue load specification recommendedby the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specification shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.



TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

Towing load specification chart with tow package — short wheel base

2WD 4WDKC CC KC CCSV SV SL SV Pro-4X SV Pro-4X SL

Maximum TowingCapacity *1, *2, *3

9,500 lb.(4,309 kg)

9,400 lb.(4,263 kg)

9,200 lb.(4,173 kg)

9,400 lb.(4,263 kg)

9,300 lb.(4,218 kg)

9,300 lb.(4,218 kg)

9,300 lb.(4,218 kg)

9,100 lb.(4,127 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 950 lb. (431 kg) 940 lb. (426 kg) 920 lb. (417 kg) 940 lb. (426 kg) 930 lb. (422 kg) 930 lb. (422 kg) 930 lb. (422 kg) 910 lb. (413 kg)Maximum King pin load 1,425 lb.

(646 kg)1,410 lb.(639 kg)

1,380 lb.(626 kg)

1,410 lb.(639 kg)

1,395 lb.(633 kg)

1,395 lb.(633 kg)

1,395 lb.(633 kg)

1,365 lb.(619 kg)

Maximum Gross CombinedWeight Rating

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

15,100 lb.(6,848 kg)

Towing load specification chart with tow package — long wheel base

2WD 4WDCC CCSV SV

Maximum TowingCapacity *1, *2, *3

9,300 lb. (4,218 kg) 9,100 lb. (4,127 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 930 lb. (422 kg) 910 lb. (413 kg)Maximum King pin load 1,395 lb. (633 kg) 1,365 lb. (619 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,100 lb. (6,848 kg) 15,100 lb. (6,848 kg)



Towing load specification chart without tow package — short wheel base

2WD 4WDKC CC KC CC

S SV S SV SL S SV S SV SLMaximum Towing

capacity*1, *2, *37,400 lb.

(3,356 kg)7,400 lb.

(3,356 kg)7,400 lb.

(3,356 kg)7,400 lb.

(3,356 kg)7,100 lb.

(3,220 kg)7,400 lb.

(3,356 kg)7,400 lb.

(3,356 kg)7,300 lb.

(3,111 kg)7,300 lb.

(3,111 kg)7,000 lb.

(3,175 kg)Maximum Tongue load

*2, *3740 lb.

(336 kg)740 lb.

(336 kg)740 lb.

(336 kg)740 lb.

(336 kg)710 lb.

(322 kg)740 lb.

(336 kg)740 lb.

(336 kg)730 lb.

(311 kg)730 lb.

(311 kg)700 lb.

(318 kg)Maximum King pin load 1,110 lb.

(504 kg)1,110 lb.(504 kg)

1,110 lb.(504 kg)

1,110 lb.(504 kg)

1,065 lb.(483 kg)

1,110 lb.(504 kg)

1,110 lb.(504 kg)

1,095 lb.(496 kg)

1,095 lb.(496 kg)

1,050 lb.(476 kg)

Maximum Gross Com-bined Weight Rating

12,800 lb.(5,806 kg)

12,800 lb.(5,806 kg)

12,800 lb.(5,806 kg)

12,800 lb.(5,806 kg)

12,800 lb.(5,806 kg)

13,000 lb.(5,897 kg)

13,000 lb.(5,897 kg)

13,000 lb.(5,897 kg)

13,000 lb.(5,897 kg)

13,000 lb.(5,897 kg)

Towing load specification chart without tow package — long wheel base

2WD 4WDCC CCSV SV

Maximum Towingcapacity*1, *2, *3

7,100 lb. (3,220 kg) 7,000 lb. (3,175 kg)

Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 710 lb. (322 kg) 700 lb. (318 kg)Maximum King pin load 1,065 lb. (483 kg) 1,050 lb. (476 kg)

Maximum Gross CombinedWeight Rating

12,800 lb. (5,806 kg) 13,000 lb. (5,897 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

*3: The maximum towing capacity when using the genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue load.



TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optionaltrailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Thishitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity ofthis vehicle when the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ballthat is rated for the trailer to be towed. GenuineNISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are availablefrom your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, check the towing capacity ofyour bumper hitch or receiver-type framemounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for yourvehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailerhitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Makesure the trailer hitch is securely attached to thevehicle to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and goosenecktrailers can also be installed on your vehicle.Contact a professional supplier of towing equip-ment to purchase and have a 5th wheel or goose-neck hitch installed.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier than theweight rating of the hitch components.Never exceed the weight rating of thehitch components. Doing so can causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mountThe hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.



Bumper towing

The genuine NISSAN step bumper has provi-sions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designedto tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb(2,268 kg).

To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in thecenter of the step bumper �A , then remove it toinstall the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitchesA weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount isone that is designed to carry the whole amount oftongue weight and gross weight directly on theball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ballmount and to the trailer to distribute the tongueweight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongue weighttransferred through the frame and pushing downon the front wheels. This gives stability to the towvehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) isrecommended if you plan to tow trailers with amaximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) .Check with the trailer and towing equipmentmanufacturers to determine if they recommendthe use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. Ifyou are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surgebrake-equipped trailer, check with thesurge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturerto determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-turer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.With the ignition on and the doors closed,allow the vehicle to stand for several minutesso that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point onthe front and rear bumpers at the center ofthe vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjustthe hitch equalizers so that the front bumperheight is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) ofthe reference height measured in step 2. Therear bumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. If therear bumper is higher than the measuredreference height when loaded, the vehiclemay handle unpredictably which couldcause a loss of vehicle control and causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

LTI0131



Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,535 kg). Aweight distributing hitch should be used to towtrailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVtrailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb(4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-hicle is only capable of towing the maximumtrailer weights shown in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart earlier in this section.

5th wheel/gooseneckA 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be towed byinstalling a 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer hitch.These types of hitches are mounted in the bed ofthe pick-up. A professional trailer equipment sup-plier should install these hitches as it is veryimportant to mount the hitch correctly to distrib-ute the king pin weight for the proper load carry-ing and sway control performance.

The king pin weight should be 15 to 25 percent ofthe fully loaded trailer. Make sure the king pinweight does not cause the gross vehicle weightto exceed the Gross Maximum Weight Rating orthe rear axle weight to exceed the Rear GrossAxle Weight rating, see “Maximum load limits”earlier in this section.

The weight of the trailer should not exceed themaximum towing capacity for the vehicle, see“Towing Load/Specification” chart earlier in thissection.

Make sure the trailer design allows for the correctvehicle to trailer clearances before purchasing a5th wheel trailer.

CAUTION

● Special hitches which include frame re-inforcements are required for towingabove 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts andhitch balls for pickup trucks and sportutility vehicles are available at aNISSAN dealer.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.



● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

● When towing with the hitch ballmounted to the rear bumper, do notmake sharp turns. The trailer may con-tact the bumper and cause damage tothe bumper or trailer.

● When towing a 5th wheel trailer, do notmake sharp turns while driving or back-ing. The trailer may contact the vehicleand cause damage to both the trailerand vehicle.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safetychains can be attached to the bumper if the hitchball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with theoptional trailer tow package are equipped with a7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer isequipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapterwill be needed to connect the trailer lights to thevehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN deal-ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail-ers.

Trailer brakesWhen towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, most statesrequire a separate braking system on trailers witha loaded weight above a specific amount. Makesure the trailer meets the local regulations andthe regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic linerunning to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes areactivated by the trailer pushing against the hitchball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulicsurge brakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system, there isno hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.



Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-tems are activated by an electronic signal sentfrom a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). If electric trailer brakes areused, see “Electric trailer brake controller” in thissection.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip-ment make sure the trailer brakes are properlyinstalled and demonstrate proper brake functiontesting.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controllerTrailers equipped with electric brakes may re-quire the installation of an aftermarket trailerbrake controller.

Your vehicle is equipped with a connector andjumper harness that is specifically designed to beused when installing an aftermarket brake con-troller.

To install the electric trailer brake controllerjumper harness, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to therearmost position.

exampleLTI0117



2. Apply the parking brake to access thejumper harness connector.

3. Locate the jumper harness connector underthe lower portion of the instrument panel.The connector is taped to the wiring harness�1 as indicated.

● The connector is marked with a white tagwith “elec brake conn”.

Wire color designation for electric trailer brakecontroller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTERED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch

to trailer brake controller.BLACK Brake controller ground

(-).BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output.RED/BLUE Trailer brake controller

illumination.RED Fused trailer brake con-

troller battery feed (B+).

LTI0118 LTI0115



4. Peel off the tape and connect the jumperharness to the connector �2 .

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brakecontroller according to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadver-tently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

LTI0116



Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case is in4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. Ifthe indicator light is flashing, or theATP light is ON, make sure the transmissionis in P (Park) (A/T) and turn the 4WD switchto 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmissionpark warning light” in the “Instruments and

controls” section and “Using four wheeldrive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving”section.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-tain adequate control, reduce your speedand shift to a lower gear. Avoid long orrepeated use of the brakes when descend-ing a hill, as this reduces their effectivenessand could cause overheating. Shifting to alower gear instead provides “engine brak-ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-quently.

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to ahigh temperature, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this owner’s manual.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.



Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-mission to a lower gear for engine brakingwhen driving down steep or long hills. Thiswill help slow the vehicle without applyingthe brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-trol (if so equipped) not be used while tow-ing a trailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

Tow modeUsing tow mode is recommended when pulling aheavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press theTOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. Theindicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi-nates when tow mode is selected. Press theTOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off.Tow mode is automatically cancelled when theignition switch is turned OFF.

Tow mode includes the following features:

● Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shiftswhen pulling a trailer or hauling a load up agrade.

● Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automati-cally downshifts when driving down a gradewith a trailer or heavy load to help controlvehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will not causeany damage. However, fuel economy may bereduced and the transmission/engine drivingcharacteristics may feel unusual.



When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

WARNING

Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.Installing a snowplow may affect vehiclehandling. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

SNOW PLOW



DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform Transport Canada in additionto notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,it may open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-port Canada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-fect Investigations and Recalls Divisiontoll free at 1-800-333-0510. You mayalso report safety defects online at:https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS



Additional information concerning motorvehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-port Canada’s Road Safety InformationCentre at 1-800-333-0371 or online atwww.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concernsplease contact our Consumer InformationCentre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or thebattery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset toa “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test,check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Place the ignition switch in theON position without starting the engine. If theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steadyfor 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , theI/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the “readycondition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data withthe type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)



To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



MEMO



10 Index4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

A

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . .5-33Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . .4-16, 4-24Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-30Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14, 4-21, 4-28Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-30

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17, 4-25Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-25Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-13, 2-14Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-32Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-49Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-39FM/AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-54

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-24Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-50Automatic transmission position indicatorlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-18

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-17Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52

B

Back button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Bluetooth� hands-free phone system . . . . .4-67Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-32Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-29Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-20, 8-21Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-20Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-13Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52CD changer (See audio system) . . . . . . .4-49CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-39Check tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24



Child restraints . . . . . . .1-24, 1-25, 1-26, 1-28Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-37, 1-43Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-46

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-11Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-11Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-13Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Startup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-54Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14, 4-21, 4-28Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-59

D

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-32Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Digital video disc DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-32Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-41Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15English/metric setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-33Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

10-2Information Provided by:


Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-13F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-11Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-54Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . .2-24, 3-12

Fuel economy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Gauge

Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth� . . . . .4-67Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Headphones (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14, 4-21, 4-28Heater operation . . . . . . . .4-15, 4-22, 4-29

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-56Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-2, 5-11Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-11In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-17

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-32Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-32Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-7

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-11Emission control information label . . . . .9-11Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-11Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-10Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61

Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28



License plateInstalling the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-12

LightAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-29Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-56Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-24, 3-12Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-16Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-24Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13

M

MaintenanceChanging the maintenance interval . . . . .4-5Displaying the maintenance noticereminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Resetting the maintenance interval. . . . . .4-6Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2, 1-3Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-32Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-17Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

N

NISSAN mobile entertainment system(MES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-2, 5-11

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Pedal position adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Phone, Bluetooth� hands-free system . . . . .4-67Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38



Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-37, 1-43Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-60Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-66Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . . .4-49FM/AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-54

Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . . .2-37Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10Remote controller (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58Remote keyless entry system. . . . . . . . . . .3-7Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-41Resetting the fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Resetting trip 1 and trip 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Child seat belts . . . . .1-26, 1-32, 1-37, 1-43Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-41

Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainmentsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-2, 1-3Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Seat belt

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-25Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-60

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-21Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-18Two-point type without retractor(rear center lap belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Seats

Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner. . . . . . . . . .3-24Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-2, 1-3

Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-2, 5-11Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Shifting

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . .5-14, 5-16Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-21Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-59Sonar

Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2



Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Startup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Steering

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-54Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

Lockable bedside storage compartment . .2-48Overhead storage compartment . . . . . .2-44

Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-61Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-62, 2-18Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-54Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-61Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-47Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-50Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . .2-37Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Tailgate latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-2, 5-11Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-40Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16Tire pressure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . . . . . .4-7Towing

2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-28Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Transceiver

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-56Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13Shift selector lock release. . . . . . . . . .5-18

Travel (See registering your vehicle inanother country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-16



Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-36Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-34Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-10Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-lizer system), engine start . . . . . .2-26, 3-2, 5-11Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

W

Warning4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-18Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . .2-13, 2-14Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-15Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-56Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-9Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-50Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-27Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19



RECOMMENDED FUEL (withoutFlexible Fuel Vehicle [FFV] option):

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION




● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV)FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if soequipped):If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuelvehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to use(E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regulargasoline or any percentage of the two fuels com-bined.

CAUTION



For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“Break-in schedule” information found in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-low these recommendations for the future reli-ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION



®

2012 TITANOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

TIT

AN

A6

0-D

A60-D

Printing : July 2011 (17)

Publication No.: OM1E 0A60U0

Printed in U.S.A.

OM2E 0A60U0Information Provided by:


2012 Nissan Titan | Owner's Manual | Nissan USA

Documents

Transcript of 2012 Nissan Titan | Owner's Manual | Nissan USA